Home

GSK 218M CNC System – Programming And Operation

1. DOP 1 Use calculator for indexing table decimal point input 0 Not use calculator for indexing table decimal point input REL 1 Relative position display setting of indexing table within 360 0 Relative position display setting of indexing table beyond 360 ABS 1 Use 360 rotation for indexing table absolute coordinate 0 Not use 360 rotation for indexing table absolute coordinate INC 1 Select the latest rotation direction 0 Not select the latest rotation direction G90 1 Indexing instruction absolute instruction 0 Indexing instruction specified by G90 G91 SIM 1 Make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in same block 0 Do not make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in same block IDX 1 B type by indexing sequence of indexing table 0 A type by indexing sequence of indexing table Standard setting 0100 0000 27 i CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL System parameter number 0 5 1 SBM G67 G67 1 To make alarm if macro instructions cancelled by non macro modal instrucions 0 Do not make alarm if macro instructions cancelled by non macro modal instrucions SBM 1 Single block allowed in macro statement 0 Single block unallowed in macro statement Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 2 cLV cev
2. 0 Not use M codes in rigid tapping VGR 1 Arbitrary gear ratio of the spindle and position encoder enabled in rigid tapping 0 Arbitrary gear ratio of the spindle and position encoder disabled in rigid tapping DOV 1 Override effective during rigid tapping retraction 0 Override ineffective during rigid tapping retraction 272 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PCP 1 To change rigid tapping for high speed peck drilling cycle 0 Not change rigid tapping for high speed peck drilling cycle FHD 1 Single block effective for feed dwell during rigid tapping 0 Single block ineffective for feed dwell during rigid tapping Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 5 ov3 ovu TDR NIZ NIZ 1 To perform the rigid tapping finishing 0 Not perform the rigid tapping finishing TDR 1 To use the same time constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction 0 Not use the same time constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction OVU 1 10 retraction override for rigid tapping 0 1 retraction override for rigid tapping OV3 1 Spindle speed effective by program instruction 0 Spindle speed ineffective by program instruction Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 6 ORI SSOG DGN DGN 1 Difference of the spindle and the tapping axis erro
3. CCV 1 Macro common variables 100 199 clearing after reset 0 Macro common variables 100 199 not clearing after reset CLV 1 Macro local variables 1 50 clearing after reset 0 Macro local variables 1 50 not clearing after reset Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 05 3 LAD3 LDA2 LAD1 LADO LADO LAD3 They are binary combined parameters If it is 0 magazine use not calling macro if they are 1 15 magazine use calling O090001 0O900015 respectively Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 4 ZNM ZNM 1 To amplify the center and override display 0 Not to amplify the center and override display Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 5 CANT CANT 1 Automatic clearing for single piece 0 Not automatic clearing for single piece Standard setting 0000 0000 275 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL System parameter number 0 5 HNGD HCL IHD HPF IHD 1 To select full running for MPG moving 0 Not select full running for MPG moving 1 MPG moving is output unit 0 MPG moving is input unit 1 Clearing MPG interruption display by soft keys enabled 0 Clearing MPG interruption display by soft keys disabled 1 Axes moving direction are identical with MPG rotation direction
4. cccecccccccccccccccceeeseeesseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeseaeceeaeaeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 1023 Pornim WO Mo raiocicennato it acssssstainsiccosie otra ust ecainedateinunb he cinaeiteaanaramiiataadieasaaatibaciauditinanaanndennacsmationnse 249 ME CCOUIIVENIANG QUINN occas cacao scscescacececeaecss E E 250 11 1 SOGAL COMMUNICATION x iovesccssncnsscunnveinenenceneacemensnseanveneanencosnsuasyetnenencnteeuanveinedeouunssuanveteatenvensens 250 EL Fora U asetreacteactrn sat raeecsusennsaveducmnatseaciasci atc esasndunadodniodlnteansaiegaaadeansnsouetoaniescaeseanntanes 250 11 1 2 Function introduction tisicidasivieisaasssaivasiewsddantcestduaivselsnnaniehdacbsneldenvebadvastsbebdaaduesisaatabeddeabeeiays 250 LLS SOWNO AOE ereraa Erra a aE aR eaor 251 112 AIS COMMU CANO ec ese T O TR 254 U2 OMEL VIC WONG peU NONS esae A 254 e PEC Wal A OM e E E A E E E E OE EEE AE ESE 254 eS Oe On E E E A E 254 IA Udieik systemes insae EA EE OE E 255 AFFENDIX Tecc seve cannes cose cauecseesseisetesess 256 TST eM UVC VS eoira NN NEN ec onacesinn on tone enieco nena cou renee ES 257 2 INGIAD SI DP Al ARIS SM acersereicosretsierswaeeecasecercautcaaceumuaanec EEEE NEEE EEEE EEE KEKEE SKEER REIDENI IE REESE ERENS 278 APPENDIX Z E S 307 11 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL I GENERALIZATION 1 Overview a hee CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL This manual is comprised by following parts
5. O KS gt S C XO oOo O O O Oo a SS ar as a ce i eS eS eml O O a a a ss O O N 0000 T0100 EDIT UN CI PMC NC MT 1 PMC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 1 This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system See GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 2 PLC gt NC interface In lt DIAGNOSIS gt page press PLC gt NC soft key to enter PLC gt NC interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 2 DIAGNOSE PMC NC 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000 0 012 00 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 00000000 023 O O a Oe eS oO O 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O a eS a ss O Co Gt OO Oo Oo O eS eme O O Ge a se O 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O a Om 2 O O O O CS SS SS wo OS CO mS O O O oS 2 OO 2 OO ot tS OS mma 2 O O tS i SO CO 2a OO a a oO oO O hml eml eml a gt a a oO OoOO O O N 0000 T0100 EDIT N C1 PMC NCI MT 1 PMC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 2 This is the signal sent to CNC system by PLC See GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number NO 203 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 MT In lt DIAGNOSIS gt page press MT soft key to enter MT page as is shown in Fig 3 3 DIAGNOSE MT 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000
6. O Fig 4 4 3 The following symbols are used for the canned cycle illustration 73 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Positioning rapid traverse G00 Cutting feed linear interpolation G01 Manual feed Offset rapid traverse GOO Dwell Canned cycle comparison table G22 G89 Table 4 4 3 Retraction Z Application direction hole bottom direction drilling cycle _ Cancel _ __ Rapid __ Drilling spot drilling Feed Dwell Rapid feed Drilling counterboring Intermittent feed Rapid feed Peck aoe cycle K JE ETD stop _ Rapid feed Boring Spindle CCW aer feed 2 Restriction In canned cycle tool offset is ignored In canned cycle mode R can t be specified in a single block i e after canned cycle starts R instruction can t be programmed by a single block Bye CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 4 1 Rough milling of circular groove G22 G23 Format G22 G98 G99 Xx Y Z RELL W Q V DF K G23 Function They are used for circular interpolations from the circle center by helical type till the circular groove programmed is machined Explanation G22 CCW inner circular groove rough milling G23 CW inner circular groove rough milling l Circular groove radius it should be over the current tool radius L Cut width increment within XY plane less than tool diameter but more than 0 W Initial cut depth in
7. Operation3 Operation5 Point Z Point Z mater Spindle stop Spindle CW Spindle stop Spindle CW After positioning along X and Y axis the Z axis rapidly traverses to point R level The spindle is rotated CCW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G84 instruction When tapping is finished the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped And traverse to initial level is then performed When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods 1 Specify M29 S before a tapping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in a block that contains a tapping instruction If G84 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next tapping operation 105 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it ca
8. DPI 1 Decimal point omitted in programming default mm sec 0 Decimal point omitted in programming default minimum unit 267 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL MAB 1 Absolute or relative setting by parameters in MDI mode 0 Absolute or relative setting by G90 G91 in MDI mode ABS 1 Instructions regarded as absolute in MDI mode 0 Instructions regarded as incremental in MDI mode Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 1 CLR Got Gi9 G18 G17 Got G01 1 G01 at power on or clearing 0 G00 at power on or clearing G17 1 G17 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G17 plane at power on or clearing G18 1 G18 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G18 plane at power on or clearing G19 1 G19 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G19 plane at power on or clearing G91 1 Toset for G91 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G90 mode at power on or clearing CLR 1 MDI reset key to clear external reset signal make emergency stop 0 MDI reset key to reset external signal make emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 0 32 AD2 CIR CIR 1 Make alarm if distance from start point to center and radius not specified in circular interpolation 0 Do not make alarm if distance from start point to center and radius not specified in circular interp
9. COR COR 1 Displayer color setting black and white 0 Displayer color setting chromatic CHI 1 To set the practical language not for Chinese 0 To set the practical language for Chinese ENG 1 To set the practical language for English 0 To set the practical language not for English Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 2 DAC DAL DRC DRL PPD MCN MCN 1 Machine position displayed by input unit 0 Machine position not displayed by input unit 264 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PPD DRL DRC DAL DAC Relative position display reset when coordinate system is set Relative position display not reset when coordinate system is set Add tool length compensation in relative position display Not add tool length compensation in relative position display Add tool radius compensation in relative position display Not add tool radius compensation in relative position display Add tool length compensation in absolute position display Not add tool length compensation in absolute position display Add tool radius compensation in absolute position display Not add tool radius compensation in absolute position display Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 3 DNC 1 0 SUK 1 0 POSM 1 0 POSM SUK DNC To clear DNC running program display by pres
10. DELETE D Press key or ERASE soft key to erase the graph drawn 3 7 Diagnosis display The status of DI DO signals between CNC and the machine the signals transferred between CNC and PLC PLC internal data and CNC internal status etc are shown in the diagnosis display Refer to GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number The diagnosis of this part are used to detect the CNC interface signals and the internal running signals and it can t be modified 3 7 1 Diagnosis data display MENA Press key to enter the Diagnose page which has 5 modes NC PLC gt NC 202 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL MT PLC gt MT and WAVE They can also be viewed by pressing the soft keys See Fig 3 7 1 to Fig 3 7 5 1 NC interface Press NC soft key in lt DIAGNOSIS gt page to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 1 DIAGNOSE NC 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000 0 0 012 0 0 001 013 002 014 003 015 004 016 005 017 006 018 007 019 008 020 009 021 010 022 011 00000000 023 NO O O amp OD OD S C O O O 2 2 2 O eme O O CO a eS eS ca O O O eS OC a aS ee O CO Om Om O O mS O O Mm Om eS O O O O Oo 2 O O OO OS Co OS a a Ss O O O O OS Oo oO eo ss O O Ca Sh HO Ks O gt 2 0 MO CO 2
11. Fig 3 9 7 The meanings of G codes used in system are shown in G code interface they can be viewed 211 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL by cursor selection And the G codes definitions are shown in the down left of the interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 7 If you want to know the format and usage of a G code you can press the lt ENTER gt key on the panel after you select a G code as is shown in Fig 3 9 8 INDEX INFO G CODE 000001 N00000 Rapid positioning G00 Instruction format G90 G91 G00 X Y Z_ Function GOO instruction tool traverse via linear Interpolation to workpiece coordinate system Position specified by absolute or incremental Instruction Explanation In absolute programming parameter represents Programming final coordinate in incremental Programming parameter represents axes moving Distance and direction P 1 46 S0000 T0000 MDI OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO gt Fig 3 9 8 The format function explanation and restriction of instructions are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in this page if you are unfamiliar with these instructions 4 PARA interface In lt INDEX gt page press PARA soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 9 INDEX INFO PARAMETER DIAGNOSE 000001 N00000 NO MEANING 0000 parameters related to SETTING bit par 0000 0002 num 0000 0001 parameters relate
12. v For the offset without an intersection When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if intersection of 127 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL the offset path is not required the vector normal to block B is created at the start point 1 Linear linear Programmed path Tool center path 0 0 00 OL Offset vector 2 Linear circular a L oe a ae a Tof center path G41 Programmed path 3 Circular circular An are whose end position s not on the are Fi Cf ra Programmed path Fi Tool center path Center Center Civ Normally there is almost no possibility of generating the situation that the length of the tool center path is larger than the circumference of a circle When G41 and G42 are changed the following situation may occur Circular circular linear circular Alarm occurs if the tool offset direction is changed and alarm that the tool offset can t be cancelled by arc instruction is issued when the tool number is DO Linear linear The tool offset direction can be changed 128 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tool center path Programmed path E f fo G43 N5 G02G91 5000Y 7000 MG G41602J 5000 N G42601x5000Y7000 In this case the tool center path is not an arc of a circle but an arc from P1 to Pe A and alarm may o
13. 7 Feed Functions F code The feed functions are used to control the feedrate of the tool They are used as following 7 1 Traverse GOO instruction is used for rapid positioning And the traverse speed can be set by number parameter P88 P92 Override can be applied to a traverse speed by the OVERRIDE adjusting keys on the operator panel as follows Re Aea BS z iE a ap at ea ft LH j N I wy Ik amp ei ae Al WY BY IA UY IR J S A A 0 0 U USA 0 001 In which FO is set by number parameter P93 The acceleration of rapid positioning G0 can be set by number parameter P105 124 It can be properly set depending on the machine and the motor response Note A feedrate F instruction is ineffective even it is specified in a block containing G00 and the system performs positioning at the speed specified by GO 7 2 Cutting feedrate Feedrate of linear interpolation GO01 circular interpolation GO2 G03 are specified with the numbers after F code The unit of it is mm min The tool moves by the feedrate programmed Override can be applied to feedrate using the override key on the operator panel Override range 0 150 In order to prevent mechanical vibration acceleration deceleration can be automatically applied at the beginning and the end of the tool movement respectively The acceleration can be set by the number parameter P125 P128 In non forecast mode the maximum cutting feedrate is set by number param
14. ENTER Method 2 Press SEARCH key input parameter number and press key for location step 4 can be ignored 5 Input the new parameter values by numerical keys ENTER 6 Press key to enter and display the parameter value 7 After all parameters are set and entered set the parameter on off for OFF 3 4 Offset display modification and setting 3 4 1 Offset display OFFSET Press key to enter offset page there are OFFSET PITCH1 EPITCH2 PITCH3 PITCH4 PITCH5 sub modes in this page They can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys which is shown as following 1 Offset page Press OFFSET soft key to enter this page Fig 3 4 1 OFFSET 000002 N0120 NO GEOM H WEAR H GEOM D WEAR D 001 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 002 0000 0000 0000 0000 003 0000 0000 0000 0000 004 0000 0000 0000 0000 005 0000 0000 0000 0000 006 0000 0000 0000 0000 007 0000 0000 0000 0000 008 0000 0000 0000 0000 009 0000 0000 0000 0000 010 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 ACT POS RELATIVE X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT Q OFFSET IE PITCH XJ PITCH YJ PITCH Z PITCH 4 gt Fig 3 4 1 Press P soft key to enter the 2 page of OFFSET lt PITCH5 Press OFFSET soft key again to enter OFFSET operation page as is shown in Fig 3 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt S oo0oo0oo0oo0oo ODO S S oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0o DO S oo0oo0oo0oo0oo o 191 CGSB
15. O com GSA yee tay ex PO es Yin BORE eee seine 11 1 2 Function introduction 1 File menu The file menu involves the functions of File Creation Open Save Print and Print setting and the latest the file list etc 2 Edit menu The edit menu involves the function such as Cut Copy Paste Retraction Find Replace 3 Serial menu It is mainly used for the open and setting of the serial ports 4 Transfer menu It involves the transfer types of DNC file sending file receiving 5 View menu It is used for the tool column display and hiding 6 Help menu 250 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL It is used to view the software version 11 1 3 Software usage 1 DNC transfer 1 Open the program file by the OPEN button in File menu or the lar tt button in tool column do a further editing by this software if necessary 2 Open and set the serial port the default DNC baudrate is 38400 which can be reset by the parameter refer to GSK218M Operation Manual The data bit has 8 stop bit has 1 and there is no parity check Data bit stop bit and parity check can t be changed 3 The sequence of the 1 and 2 step can be exchanged which doesn t affect the following transfer and machining but the following steps must be operated by sequence or the transfer and machining will be affected 4 As the CNC system and machine are ready press the key on panel 5 Open the DNC item in Transf
16. ntencolation Motor fa Y axis 7 Ca Movement chotar along straight ine bj Movement along arc Note Forsome machines it is the worktable moving other than tool moving in practice It is assumed that the tool moves relative to the workpiece in this manual Refer to the machine actual movement direction in practice to protect against personnel hurt and machine damage 1 2 Feed Feed function The feedrate specification is called feed function mnmymin Workpiece To specify a speed to machine the part by tool is called feed and the machine speed is instructed by a numerical value For example the program instruction is F150 if tool feeds by 150mm min CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 3 Cutting feedrate spindle speed function Tool diameter D mm Y Cutting speed mimin Workpiece The speed of tool relative to workpiece in cutting is called cutting feedrate It can be instructed by spindle speed RPM r min by CNC Example If the tool diameter is 10mm cutting linear speed is 8 m min the spindle speed is about 255RPM according to N 1000V nD so the instruction is S255 Instructions related to spindle speed are called spindle speed function 1 4 Operation instruction miscellaneous function When the workpiece is to be machined to make the spindle run and supply coolant the machine spindle motor and cooling pump switches must be controlled by actual r
17. 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0051 Y coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0052 Z coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0053 4TH coordinate of the 2nd reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0054 5TH coordinate of the 2nd reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 282 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0055 X coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0056 Y coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0057 Z coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0058 4TH coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0059 5TH coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0060 X coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0061 Y coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Settin
18. G82 G82 X YZRPF_ Drilling cycle counter boring cycle Tr HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle T ilie cycle M M e Write into the block with other program Absolute programming Incremental programming SS Constant surface speed control ER Constant surface speed control cancel cutting speed Write into the block with other program Return to initial point in canned cycle Return to point R level in canned cycle Note 1 For the G code with sign when the power is switched on the system is in the state of this G code Note 2 G codes except G10 G11 in 00 group are all non modal G code Note 3 Alarm occurs if G code not listed in this table is used or G code without the selection function is specified Note 4 G codes from different groups can be specified in a block but 2 or more G codes from the same group can t be specified in a block otherwise alarm or tool abnormity occurs Note 5 In canned cycle if G code from 01 group is specified the canned cycle will be cancelled automatically and system turns into G80 state But G codes in 01 group are not affected by G codes in canned cycle Note 6 Gcodes are represented by group numbers repectively according to their types All G codes can be cleared by bit parameter No 35 0 7 and No 36 0 7 setting at system reset and emergency stop es CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION
19. Note If several words to be cut are same in program it will cut the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location 245 CGSB m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 10 1 7 Replacement of the blocks Steps of block replacement are as following a Enter the program edit page Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the character to be altered c Key in the new character d Press the REPLACE soft key the character where the cursor locates will be replaced by the new one ALTER The block replacement can also be done by the key on the panel see details in Section 10 1 1 5 10 1 8 Rename of a program Rename the current program a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page cursor specifies the program name c Press address key o key in the new name ALTER d Press key to complete the rename 10 1 9 Program restart The program restart function is used under the situation that accident occurs during running such as tool braking off system restarting after power off emergency stop After the accident is eliminated this function can be used for returning to program braking off position to go on execution and retracting to original point by GOO The steps for program restart are as following 1 Solve the machine accident such as tool change offset changing machine zero w 2 In lt AUTO gt mode press the Fae EAT key on the panel PROGRAM 3 Press key to enter
20. Overview It describes the chapter structure system model available relative instructions and the note Il Programming It describes G functions and the programming format characteristics and restrictions by NC language III Operation It describes the manual and auto operation program input output and editing methods Appendix It describes parameter list alarm list and programming data table The manual is used for GSK218M CNC system CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Il PROGRAMMING CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 General 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation 1 Tool movement along a straight line Point Program instruction S07 20F 100 Move from point A to point B M50 50 then fram point E to point C Point 6 Waorkplece Tol Program Point A origin XO O 2 Tool movement along an arc 3014 100 5UF 500 Move from point A to point B sU545U Y1U0R5U Move from point B to point Point B Tool Program Point A origin XO O The tool linear and arc motion function is called interpolation The programming instructions such as G01 G02 are called preparatory function which is used for interpolation for CNC device CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a Movement along straight line ib Movement along arc G01 Y__ G03X Y R ee elie x axis __ m
21. P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M4 100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G74 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning tap hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning tap hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning tap hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning tap hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 13 Fine boring cycle G76 Format G76 X_YZQRPF K_ Function Itis used for boring a hole precisely When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops and the tool departs from the machined surface of the workpiece and retr
22. PACD Pils PILS PPCK ASL PLAC STL STL 1 To select prereading working type 0 To select non prereading working type PLAC 1 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation exponential 0 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation linear ASL 1 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting speed difference control 0 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting angular control PPCK 1 To perform in position check by forecasting 0 Not perform in position check by forecasting PILS 1 Forecasting interpolation type circular interpolation 0 Forecasting interpolation type linear interpolation PIIS 1 Overlapping interpolation effective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting 0 Overlapping interpolation ineffective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting PACD 1 Acceleration deceleration type before forecasting S 0 Acceleration deceleration type before forecasting linear Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 1 6 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL FBOL 1 Rapid traverse type back acceleration deceleration 0 Rapid traverse type fore acceleration deceleration FBLS 1 Fore acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse S 0 Fore acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear FLLS 1 Back acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse exponential 0 Back acceleration deceleration type o
23. PROGRAM b Press key to display the program there are two ways to delete program a Key in address a key in the program name e g For O0001 program key in the numerical ey 8 0 oj 1 press ner key the corresponding program in memory will be deleted b Select DIR page in program interface then select the program name to be deleted DELETE by moving cursor and press key the program selected will be deleted 10 1 3 Deletion of all programs The steps for deleting all programs in the memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page c Key inthe address oy 9 d Key in the address keys o s o o KI by sequence DELETE e Press key all the programs in the memory will be deleted 10 1 4 Copy of a program Steps for copying current program and saved for a new name a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page in DIR page select the program to be copied by cursor keys ENTER then press key to enter the program page c Press address key 0 and key in the new program number ANGE d Press the key the file will be copied and the control enters the new program 244 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL edit page e Returnto DIR page the name of the new program copied can be viewed The copy of the program can also be done in the program edit page 1 Press address key 0 and key in the new program number 2 Pressthe COPY so
24. inear gt Linear Circular Linear Workpiece f Programmed path Work piece Tool center path ae si CG ae A L intersection arire Programmed path Tool center path c Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Circular linear Programmed path Circular Linear Linear Linear Workpiece Programmed path Tool center path Tool center path Programmed path d Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 Linear linear 126 CGSER P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tool center path 5 Offset direction change in offset mode The offset direction is defined by tool radius compensation G code The sign of the offset value is as following Sign of offset value rege rr In a special situation the offset direction can be changed in offset mode however the direction change is unallowed in the start up block and the block following it There is no inner and outer side when the offset direction is changed The following offset value is assumed to be positive i Linear linear ii Linear circular Programmed path L Tool center path iii Circular linear Civ Circular circular G42 Tool center path Tool center path Low Programmed path 54 Programmed path
25. is issued by the system If not Password is not correct is issued 3 Modify the corresponding parameters and setting for the system password a The program on off is required to be set for ON during the parameter modification b K parameter is needed to be set for ON during the ladder modification 4 After modification the password is automatically deregistered after the system power off and reset 3 6 Graphic display GRAPHIDD Press key to enter the graphic page that has two display modes GRAPH PARA and GRAPH They can be switched over by pressing the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 6 1 200 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL GRAPH PARA 000000 N00000 0 XY 1 XZ 227 3 YZ 4 XYZ D5 ZXY AXES 0 GRPH MOD 0 CO GRPH CENT 1 MIN amp MAX AUTO ERA 0 0 OFF1 ON SCAEL 1 0000 GRPH CEN 0 0000 X COORDINATE GRPH CEN 0 0000 CY COORDINATE GRPH CEN 0 0000 Z COORDINATE MAX X 240 0000 MAX Y 0000 MAX Z 0000 MIN X 0000 MIN Y 0000 MIN Z 0000 S0000 T0000 DATA EDIT KG PARA GRAPH Fig 3 6 1 1 Graphic parameter page Press GRAPH PARA soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 6 1 A Graphic parameter meaning Coordinate selection set drawing plane that has 6 types as shown in the next line 2 Graphic mode set graphic display mode Scaling set drawing ratio 4 Graphic center set the coordinate of the LCD center
26. we2e 4 8 CGS I H1S GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Example To rough mill an inner rectangular groove as shown in the following by canned cycle G33 instruction J 50 L i0 I T0 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G33 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 170 J50 L10 W20 Q10 V10 U5 F800 To run the inner rectangular groove rough milling cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 Format G35 G98 G99 Xx Y Z R_L J L VU D_ F_ K G36 Function They are used for fine milling within a rectangle by the width and direction specified and the tool returns after fine milling Explanation For these instructions refer to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G35 CCW inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G36 CW inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle l Rectangular width in X axis ranging within O 9999 999mm Rectangular width in Y axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm Distance of start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm C r Corner radius no corner transition if omitted Alarm is issued if U is omitted or equal to 0 and the tool radius is over 0 D Tool diameter number ranging within O 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY
27. 0 9999 0186 Alarm time for abnormal load detection 500 Setting range 0 9999 0189 Reverse precision by backlash compensation 0 0100 Setting range 0 0001 1 0000 mm Set a p 189 x 0 0001 in reverse feeding if the feeding of single servo period is over a the backlash compensation begins Therefore in machining outer circle contour with a larger radius in order to make the offset position not to exceed the quardrant it needs to set a smaller precision While in machining a curve surface in order to not to perform backlash compensation in a fixed point of the tool path to form a swollen ridge it needs to set a larger precision to make the clearance compensation to be distributed in a certain width 0190 Backlash compensation amount of X axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0191 Backlash compensation amount of Y axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0192 Backlash compensation amount of Z axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0193 Backlash compensation amount of 4TH axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0194 Backlash compensation amount of 5TH axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0195 Compensation step of X axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0196 Compensation step of Y axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0197 Compensation step of Z axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range O0 99 9999
28. 0 9999 9999 Servo loop gain of Y axis 0 0000 0172 Setting range 0 9999 9999 Servo loop gain of Z axis 0 0000 292 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0173 Setting range 0 9999 9999 Servo loop gain of 4TH axis 0 0000 0174 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0175 In position width of X axis servo 0 0000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm 0176 In position width of Y axis servo 0 0000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm 0177 In position width of Z axis servo 0 0000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm 0178 In position width of 4TH axis servo 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0179 In position width of 5TH axis servo 0 0000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm 0180 Cutting feed in position width setting of axes 0 0000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm 0181 Maximum position error allowable for axes moving 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0182 Maximum position error allowable for axes stopping 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0183 Position error limit when axis servo is off 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0184 Servo error allowable for reference point return 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0185 Axes grid reference point offset amount 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0186 Alarm time for abnormal load detection 500 293 Servo loop gain of 5TH axis 0 0000 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Setting range
29. 13 Binary to algorism 1 BCD J G65 H25 P I Q J Example G65 H25 P 201 Q 202 201 BCD 202 14 Compound multiplication and division 1 1x J K G65 H26 P I Q J R k Example G65 H26 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 201x 202 203 15 Compound square root 1 V J K G65 H27 P I Q J R K 2027 2037 Example G65 H27 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 16 Sine 1 JeSIN K Unit o degree G65 H31 P I Q J R K Example G65 H31 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 SIN 203 17 Cosine 1 JeCOS K Unit o degree G65 H32 P I Q J R k Example G65 H32 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 COS 203 18 Tangent J TAM K Unit o degree G65 H33 P I Q J R K Example G65 H33 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 TAM 203 19 Cotengent ATAN J K Unit o degree G65 H34 P I Q J R k Example G65 H34 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 ATAN 202 203 Note 1 The unitof P S are 1 o degree Note2 IfQ R required are not specified in operations above they are defaulted for zero Note 3 TRUNC rounding operation the decimal portion is abandoned Transfer command 1 Unconditional transfer G65 H80 Pn n Sequence number Example G65 H80 P120 To N120 block 2 Conditional transfer 1 J EQ K G65 H81 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H81 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 3
30. 2 0 Stop bits of communication channel 0 1 2957 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL ASIO SB1 ASI1 IOP 1 Data input code of channel 0 ASII 0 Data input code of channel 0 EIA or ISO 1 Stop bits of communication channel 1 2 0 Stop bits of communication channel 1 1 1 Data input code of channel 1 ASII 0 Data input code of channel 1 EIA or ISO 1 Program input and output stop STOP key 0 Program input and output stop NC reset Standard setting 1101 1100 System parameter number 0 0 3 DIRS DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX INM DIRX DIRY DIRZ DIR4 DIRS 1 Min moving unit of linear axis Inch 0 Min moving unit of linear axis Metric 1 X axis feeding direction 0 X axis feeding direction reversing 1 Y axis feeding direction 0 Y axis feeding direction reversing 1 Z axis feeding direction 0 Z axis feeding direction reversing 1 4 axis feeding direction 0 4 axis feeding direction reversing 1 5 axis feeding direction 0 5 axis feeding direction reversing Standard setting 0011 1000 System parameter number 0 04 XIK AZR SFD JAX JAX mode SFD AZR XIK 1 Synch controlled axes for manual reference point mode 1 axes only zero return 0 Synch controlled axes for manual reference point mode multiple axes 1 Reference point offset use yes 0 Referen
31. CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL eau ON ae 1 10 ee en ene ae E ae ee ee eee eee E ee aD 162 T2 Feedperminute G94 grascseressntscnisandashenandnsndasedes bows bdesedesviastnsaaneniaamischenshiasodesodecnesebiasnens 163 T22 Feedpro agg eases saa cannes E E ATOT 163 7 3 Tangential speed control eseeeeesessssssssssssssrreerrrsssssssssssesrerrrerrersesssssssserrrerrerereesssssssssererrrees 164 7 4 Feedrate override keys ccccccccccccccccccccceeesesssssssssseceeeeseccceceeeeeesseessssaeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeenes 164 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration 0 0 cccccsscccccsssssccceeessseeeceeeesseeeceessseeeceeesssseeeeeessseeeeeeens 164 7 6 Acceleration deceleration for corner of a DIOCK sessessssssesssseseessssssessssesressssereessseeresssee 166 WOON II COI ea sa cei sagesasaes acsvicesusavaieiecsnacas aaeiaavessss 167 oT WO OI TUNG HOM sesir E E N E NE NEE R AA 167 U OPERATION crer E A caste useacssacssansasvsceataes sasetesessstiss 168 T Operor Panelen anaa aA NE aeaa EAA AEEA TT Tre 169 L1 ROW VY OUI aseesies to ses ceseracenes opresnainctecesnsiestatesaaatsoeasusstacansieteiesasivotesnaeuonasssnacanueiiacoamiaaesenetorananeeacs 169 1 2 Explanation of the panel function ieee ccccccccecseeesessessssssseessssssececeeseeseseeeseststeeeess 169 Lee MCT Give e a a 169 C E ae a E EAE O EE 170 2S a Treron On KC YS a E ER 170 L24 T ontiol a aaaeeeaa ER E 172 2 System Power On Off and
32. Fig 4 6 2 2 where Ls Les2mm Programmed path ae D Tool center path T The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 6 2 2 Straight Line to straight line 4 When a programmed path consists of two arcs the feedrate is overriden if the start and end points are in the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants Fig 4 6 2 3 The feedrate is ovemidden from point a to b Fig 4 6 2 3 Arc to arc 141 CGSB m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 Regarding a program from straight line to arc or from arc to straight line the feedrate is overriden from point a to point b and from point c to point d Fig 4 6 2 4 Programmed path Tool center path Tool Fig 4 6 2 4 Straight line to arc arc to staight line Restriction 1 Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration deceleration before interpolation 2 Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by a start up block or followed by a block including G41 or G42 3 Override for inner corner is not performed if the offset is zero 4 7 Macro G code 4 7 1 Custom macro The function by a group instructions can be saved into memory like a subprogram in advance and the functions are represented by an instruction If the instruction is written out in the program these functions can be used This group instructions are called custom macro body and the instruction represented is called custom macr
33. If key is pressed the program execution is continued If the 1 Machine feeding slows down and stops key is pressed during the auto running the machine status is 2 Dwell continues if Dwell is being executed G04 instruction 3 The remaining modal message is saved 4 The program execution is continued after key is pressed 4 Press key 227 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Section 2 3 1 5 Press EMERGENCY STOP button See Section 2 3 2 In addition if the control is switched to other mode from Auto mode DNC mode MDI interface of MDI mode in which the program being executed the machine can also be stopped The steps are as following 1 If the control is switched to Edit MDI DNC mode the machine stops after the current block is executed 2 If the control is switched to JOG MPG Step mode the machine interruption stops immediately 3 If the control is switched to Machine zero interface the machine slows down to stop 7 4 Auto running from an arbitrary block This system permits the current program to be executed from an arbitrary block of it The steps are as following PROM key to enter Edit mode then press key to enter program page 1 Press select the program to be executed in DIR 2 Open the program and move the cursor to the block to be executed 5 cm 3 Start spindle and other miscellaneous functions by pressing aoe key
34. MANUAL Format o Explanation 1 A block can contain only one S code 2 The spindle speed can be specified directly by address S and a numerical value followed The unit of it is r min e g For M3 S300 it means the spindle runs at a speed of 300 r min 3 Ifthe move instruction and S code are specified in a same block they are executed simultaneously 4 The spindle speed is controlled by S code followed by a numerical value 6 2 Spindle switch volume control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 1 the spindle speed is controlled by switch volume specified by address S and two digits number followed Four gears are available in this system as spindle speed is controlled by switch volume See details on the correspondence of S code and the spindle speed as well as the gears in the manual by machine builder Format S01 S1 S02 S2 S03 S3 S04 S4 Explanation 1 Alarm is issued and the execution stops if S code beyond the codes above is specified in program 2 Fora two digit S code the latter two digits are effective if S code is specified with 158 CGSB I HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a four digit number 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 Format Constant surface speed control instruction G96 S_ Surface speed m min or feet min Constant surface speed control cancel instruction G97 S_ Spindle speed rmp Constant surface speed controlled axis instruction
35. deceleration time constant for a cut ting and JOG feed parameter 04 7 Time 7 6 Acceleration deceleration for corner of a block For example if Y axis moves in a block and X axis moves in the block following the tool path is as following during the Y axis deceleration and the X axis acceleration Insert a dwell instruction here r Y Programmed path 2 Actual tool path If the dwell exact stop instruction is inserted the tool moves along the real line as in above figure by the program Otherwise the bigger the cutting feedrate is or the longer the time constant of the acceleration deceleration the bigger the arc at the corner is For circular instruction the actual arc radius of the tool path is smaller than the radius given by the program Under the condition allowed by mechanical system reduce the time constant of the acceleration deceleration as far as possible to decrease the error at the corner 166 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 8 Tool Function 8 1 Tool function By specifying a numerical value up to128 following address T tools can be selected on the machine Only one T code can be specified in a block Refer to the machine builder s manual for the number with address T and the corresponding machine operation of T code When a move instruction and a T code are specified in a same block the instructions are executed in the following two
36. i aia ao eo ae ee oui ee m H J an 1 Pit Po ie Pit IE o ibi j0 2 ET radius mm Fig 6 6 2 Relations of workpiece radius spindle speed and surface speed 5 Surface speed is specified in G96 mode 696 mode GO mode Soecity the surface speed in mmr forteevimin siora ihe surface speed in mimin orfeetimin Specify The soecified the spindle spindle spaad speed FEIT ia used Mot specified The Surface speed rein oF feet a converted io spindle speed rpm Commands other than G36 Mel specified The stowed surface speed miwn or feetimin is used_ Eno surface speed ia stoned 0 m assumed 160 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Restriction 1 Because the response problem in the servo system may not be considered when the spindle speed changes while the constant surface speed is still effective during threading so it is recommended to cancel the constant surface speed by G97 before threading In a traverse block specified by GOO the constant surface speed control is not made by calculating the surface speed by a transient change of the tool position but is made by calculating the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the traverse block on the condition that cutting is not performed during traverse Therefore the constant surface cutting speed is not needed 161 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL
37. in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate G88 G98 G88 G99 Spindle CTY Z J a pinitial level ae Spindle CCW Faint R Point R level Point Z Point Z Spindle stop Spindle Stop after dwell after dwell After positioning along X and Y axis the tool rapidly traverses to point R level Boring is performed from point R level to point Z When boring is completed a dwell is performed then the spindle is stopped The tool is manually retracted from the hole bottom point Z to point R level in G99 or the initial level in G98 and the spindle is rotated CCW Before specifying G88 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G88 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to po
38. mm 0028 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0029 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0030 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0031 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 _Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0032 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 280 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0033 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0034 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_ 5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0035 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0036 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0037 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0038 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_ 4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0039 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0
39. not the reference point an alarm is issued 2 In machine lock mode even G27 is specified and the tool has automatically returned to the reference point the indicator for return completion doesn t light up 3 In an offset mode the position to be reached by the tool with G27 instruction is the position obtained by adding the offset Therefore if the position with the offset added is not the reference point the indicator does not light up and an alarm is issued Usually the tool offset should be cancelled before G27 instruction 4 4 Canned cycle G code Canned cycle make it easier for the programmer to creat programs With a canned cycle a machining operation by multiple blocks can be realized by a single block which contains G function In this system only canned cycle in G17 plane is available The general process of canned cycle A canned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations as Fig 4 4 1 shows 69 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Operation 1 ee E HO Initial level I Operation 2 lt Operation 6 I I Point R level ri Operation 5 Operation 3 Va Rapid traverse Operation 4 Feed Fig 4 4 1 Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y may including another axis Operation 2 Traverse to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 T
40. to many rereana o feens o fe o 0236 T prooem resen pamer r wema O 0238 Tares o 310 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0351 SPC alarm n axis communication servo alarm n axis superheterodyning servo alarm n axis move too fast 0505 software overtravel Z 311 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0518 hardware overtravel 5th 0519 hardware overtravel 5th 0740 rigid tapping alarm superheterodyning 0741 rigid tapping alarm superheterodyning 0742 rigid tapping alarm LSI overflow 0751 Ist spindle alarm AL XX detected 0754 spindle abnormal torque alarm 1001 relay or coil address not specified 1003 incorrect COM SUB9 instruction use 312 1012 sign input undefined CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a 1025 relay or coil insufficient 1026 sequential program can t be restored troubleshooting Clear all data 1028 Annotation area is full troubleshooting Reduce annotation m m m m m E m 1033 parameter number specified for more than 1 time 1034 read write interface start error 313 re PM HISk IS WSs SER Zo GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD Add No 52 1 Street Luochong North Road Luochongwei Guangzhou 510165 China E mail gsk gsk com cn Fax 86 20 81993683 July 2007 Edition 2 Website http www gsk com cn Tel 86 20 81796410 81797922 All
41. 0000 5 G58_ 5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0040 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0041 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0042 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 _Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0043 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 281 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0044 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_ 5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0045 X coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0046 Y coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0047 Z coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0048 4TH coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0049 5TH coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0050 X coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range
42. 0316 Position error limit of tapping axis moving in rigid tapping pO Setting range O 100 0317 Position error limit of spindle moving in rigid tapping Setting range O 100 0318 Error limit at tapping axis stopping in rigid tapping Setting range O 100 0319 Error limit at spindle stopping in rigid tapping Setting range O 100 0320 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 1st gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0321 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0322 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0323 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CCMR 1st gear Setting range 1 256 0324 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 2nd gear Setting range 1 256 302 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0325 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CCMR 3rd gear Setting range 1 256 0326 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD st gear Setting range 1 256 0327 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CCMD 2nd gear Setting range 1 256 0328 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 3rd gear Setting range 1 256 0329 Rotational angle with no rotational angle specified in coordinate rotation Setting range 0 9999 9999 0330 Scaling with no scaling specified Setting range 0 9999 9999 0331 Scaling of X axis Settin
43. 1 return 0 AWK 1 0 pf AWK ee To cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point Not cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point return To change display immediately when workpiece origin offset is changed To change next block display when workpiece origin offset is changed Standard setting 0000 0000 0 10 RLC 1 0 G52 1 0 6s2 Rre To cancel local coordinate system after resetting Not cancel local coordinate system after resetting To add tool compensation vector at local coordinate system setting Not add tool compensation vector at local coordinate system setting Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 1 1 LZR 0 BFA wR To perform travel check before manual reference point return after power on Not perform travel check before manual reference point return after power on 260 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL BFA 1 To make alarm after overtravel when overtravel instruction is given 0 To make alarm before overtravel when overtravel instruction is given Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01 2 FDR RDR TDR RFO LRP RPD RPD 1 Manual rapid effective before reference point return after power on 0 Manual rapid
44. 10 1 3 EVE 4 Press key to set up the new program name it displays Fig 10 1 4 PROGRAM 000002 NO1L80 000002 S0000 T0100 EDIT MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 4 5 Input the blocks programmed word by word then press interface switching key e g POSTON page or the mode switchover key the program will be saved automatically and the program input is finished Note 1 In Edit mode only the complete word can be entered Single letter and 240 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL numerical number input is not supported by system Note 2 If word error is found in program inputting it can be cancelled by pressing BAES ANE GANEL key to delete one by one or pressing key to delete the whole word 10 1 1 3 Search of sequence number word and line number Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in a program so that the execution and edit can be started from the block containing this sequence number Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates M S T and G codes does not affect the CNC coordinates and modal values If the execution needs to be done from a searched block in a program specify M S T and G codes coordinates and so forth as required by MDI after closely checking the machine and CNC states at that point The word search function
45. BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO1 MACRO2 Fig 3 3 2 See details about this parameter in Appendix 1 3 Macro variable 1 page Press MACRO 1 soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 3 189 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL COMMON VARIABLES 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 0000 0012 0001 0013 0002 0014 0003 0015 0004 0016 0005 0017 0006 0018 0007 0019 0008 0020 0009 0021 0010 0022 0011 0023 ALWAYS NULL DATA EDIT BITPAR INUMPAR MACRO1 MACRO2 50000 T0100 Fig 3 3 3 4 Macro variable 2 page Press MACRO 2 soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 4 SYSTEM VARIABLES 000002 N0120 NO DATA DATA 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 INPUT INTERFACE SIGNAL NO S0000 T0100 EDIT BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO1 MACR02 Fig 3 3 4 O Oo O CO Oo OC 2 o o oo O O Oe a ia ss ts 3 3 2 Modification and setting of the parameter values 1 Select MDI mode 2 Enter lt SET gt mode input the corresponding password in the gne page PSD mode of the setting and lt RETURN gt to ON OFF mode to set the parameter on off for ON ARAMETE 3 Press key to enter the parameter page 4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be changed 190 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Method 1 Press page keys to display the parameter to be set then move the cursor to the place to be modified
46. BPS 0003 Waiting time of screen protection minute Setting range 0 999 0004 System interpolation period 1 2 4 8ms Setting range 1 8 0005 Axes controlled by CNC Setting range 375 0006 Program axis name of rotary axis When the CNC controlled axes is set for 4 the program axes names of rotary axes are set for 0 1 2 the 4 axis name is displayed for A B C respectively When the CNC controlled axes is set for 5 the program axes names of rotary axes are set for 1 2 12 10 20 21 the 4 and 5 axis names are displayed for AB AC BC BA CA CB respectively 0007 Axis name setting in primary coordinate system 0008 Servo axis number of each axis 0010 External workpiece origin offset amount along X axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 278 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0011 External workpiece origin offset amount along Y axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0012 External workpiece origin offset amount along Z axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0013 External workpiece origin offset amount along 4th 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0014 External workpiece origin offset amount along 5th 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0015 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0016 Origin offset amount
47. CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL POSTION PRUGRAM PAMARETER OFFSET Position Program Parameter Offset page page page page SET GRAPHKS MAGNUSIS ALARM Setting Graphic Diagnosis Alarm page page page page PLG INDEX PLC page Index page Name Explanation Position Press this key to enter Relative coordinate absolute coordinate of current page position page point comprehensive display program monitoring display by changing soft keys Program Press this key to enter Program MDI current mode current time program page program page directory display by changing soft keys and program directory is switched over by page keys Parameter Press this key to enter Bit parameter number parameter and macro page parameter page variable page display by changing soft keys to view and modify the parameter Offset Press this key to enter 2 pages used to set the tool length and radius and page offset page the pitch error compensation of each axis by changing soft keys Setting Press this key to enter 2 pages setting parameter on off coordinate page program page panel servo system data and password setting display by changing soft keys Graphic Press this key to enter For graphic parameter graphic display page and the setting page graphic center dimension ratio and display page setting by changing soft keys Diagnosis Press this key to enter To view the I O signals in the system
48. Coe Gli Crs Arc of 8 plane 02 G18 EE Arc of YZ plane G02 ae en eee A Function It is used to move the tool to a position specified from current position by a feedrate specified by parameter F in a helical path Explanation F fa Tool path eae P aer iris AE AE es fie Eeee A weal The first two bits of the instruction parameter are positioning parameter The parameter words are the two axes name X Y or Z in current plane These two positioning parameters specify the position the tool is to go to The third parameter word of the instruction parameter is a linear axis except the circular interpolation axis Its value is the helical height The significance and restriction for other instruction parameters are identical with circular interpolation If the circle can t be machined by the system specified instruction parameter the system will give error message And the system changes the current tool moving mode for G02 G03 Feedrate along the two circular interpolation axes are specified A moving axis that is not circular interpolation axis is added as for the instruction method mode and F instruction specifies the feedrate along an arc So the feedrate of this linear axis is as following Length of circular are Length of linear axis F The feedrate should be ensured that the linear axis feedrate are not beyond any limit gs CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION M
49. Conditional transfer2 J NE K G65 H82 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number 149 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Example G65 H82 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 4 Conditional transfer 3 J GT K gt G65 H83 Pn Q J RAK n Sequence number Example G65 H83 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 gt 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 lt 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 5 Conditional transfer 4 J LTHAK lt G65 H84 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H84 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 lt 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 2 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 6 Conditional transfer5 J GE K 2 G65 H85 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H85 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 lt 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 lt 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 7 Conditional transfer6 J LE K s G65 H86 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H86 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 s 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 gt 202 the execution proceeds by sequence Note The sequence number can be specified by variables Such as G65 H81 P 200 Q 201 R 202 if the conditions are met it goes to the block whose number is specified by 200 5 Logic AND logic OR and logic NOT instructions Example G65 H01 P 100 QO G65 H01 P 101 Q3 G65 H01 P 102 Q5 G
50. FORWARD RETRACTION A Ys Yb V W LUBRICATING COOLING CHIP REMOVAL 0 001 0 01 0 1 I OVERTRAVEL PROG RESTART OPTIONAL STOP pooh Control area 1 2 Explanation of the panel function 1 2 1 LCD area The display area of this system is applied with a 10 4 inch chromatic LCD that has 640x480 resolution 169 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 2 2 Edit area Explanation Reset key Press this key to reset the system feed and stop output Address Press these keys to input address key Press this key to delete the characters entered not saved in key buffer Enter key Press this key to save the data into the buffer when numerical keys or address keys are pressed Help key Press this key to display the help directory and PMC ladder Screen Press any key of them to enter the corresponding operation interface introduced below Page keys Press these keys to change the page on the screen in the same display mode 10 Edit keys Press these keys to move the cursor to the beginning or the end E Gime meaane aoo 11 Edit keys Press these keys to insert modify and delete the programs pa words etc in program edit 1 2 3 Screen operation keys 9 page display keys and 1 help display key are laid out in this operator panel which are as 170
51. Fig 4 6 1 1 y Position check s Tool path in the exact stop mode i Tool path in the cutting mode or tapping mode X Fig 4 6 1 1 Tool path from block 1 to block 2 4 6 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 Format G62 Function Once specified this function is effective till G63 G61 or G64 is specified When the tool moves along an inner corner during tool radius compensation override is applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress the amount of cutting per unit of time to get a good surface finish Explanation 1 When the tool moves along an inner corner and inner arc area during tool radius compensation it decelerates automatically to reduce the load of the tool to get a smooth surface 2 When G62 is specified and the tool path with tool radius compensation forms an inner corner the feedrate is automatically overriden at both ends of the corner There are four types of inner corners as shown in Fig 4 6 2 1 In figure 2 s lt Ops178 Op is set by number parameter P144 140 CGSB P HISKF GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 Linear linear Y Tool 2 Linear circular Programmed path ee rc ee ee Tool center path 3 Circular linear Fig 4 6 2 1 3 When a corner is determined to be an inner corner the feedrate is overriden before and after the inner corner The Ls and Le where the feedrate is overriden are distances from points on the tool center path to the corner
52. G96 Pn P1 X axis P2Y axis P3 Z axis P4 4 axis Max spindle speed clamping G92 S_ S specifies the max spindle speed rmp Function The number following S is used to specify the surface speed relative speed of tool and workpiece The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the tool position Explanation 1 G96 is a modal instruction After it is specified the program enters the constant surface speed control mode and the S value specified is assumed as a surface speed 2 A G96 instruction must specify the axis along which constant surface speed control is applied It can be cancelled by G97 instruction 3 To execute the constant surface speed control it is necessary to set the workpiece coordinate system and the coordinate value at the center of the rotary axis becomes Zero Fig 6 1 1 Workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control 4 When constant surface speed control is applied if a spindle speed higher than the value specified in G 92 S_ it is clamped at the maximum spindle speed When the power is switched on the maximum spindle speed is not yet set the S in G96 is regarded as zero till M3 or M4 appears in program 159 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Spindle speed min 1 i The spindle speed min almost sn coincides with the surface speed ro m min at approx 160 mm radius 7HE Surface speed SEN S is 600 m min
53. GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0113 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid 4TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0114 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range O 400 ms 0115 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range O 400 ms 0116 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range O 400 ms 0117 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range O 400 ms 0118 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid 4TH axis Setting range O 400 ms 0119 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range O 400 ms 0120 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range O 400 ms 0121 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range O 400 ms 0122 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range O 400 ms 0123 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid 4TH axis 288 CGS I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Setting range O 400 ms 0124 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range O 400 ms 0125 L type time constant o
54. I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL OFFSET 000002 N0120 NO GEOM H WEAR H GEOM D WEAR D 001 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 008 0000 0000 0000 0000 009 0000 0000 0000 0000 010 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 ACT POS RELATIVE X 0 0000 Y DATA INPUT INPUT INPUT Fig 3 4 2 The offset value may be input directly or operated with the actual position value H stands for 002 003 004 005 006 007 ooo 2 oa Oo Oo o oD oo Soo 6c oc oC Oo 6 oOo Co So oo 2 oC 6 6 S S COC COCUCCOCUCCCCO CO 0 0000 50000 T0100 MDI RETURN gt 0 0000 Z length compensation and D for radius compensation 2 Pitch X page Press PITCH X soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 4 3 X PIT ERROR MOST 256 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA o o CO CO CO OC Co Oo O 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 o oS OS SS OS OOOO 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50000 T010 EDIT OFFSET PITCHX PITCH Y PITCH Z PITCH 41 gt Fig 3 4 3 Note The display of pitch offset for Y Z 4 5 axis is the same as that of X axis 3 4 2 Modification and setting of the offset value 3 4 2 1 The steps for tool offset in Tool Offset pa
55. In this mode the M S T instructions are not executed This function is used for program verification with the Machine Lock Note M00 M30 M98 M99 is executed by convention 7 9 Feedrate and rapid override in auto run In lt AUTO gt mode the feedrate and rapid traverse speed can be overriden by the system In auto run the feedrate override classified for 16 gears can be selected by pressing F A Puts Arok The feedrate override ascends for a gear 5 till 150 each time the ti anes keys tt Vu key is pressed The feedrate override descends for a gear 5 till O each time the key is pressed Note F value in feedrate override program 230 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The actual feedrate F value specifiedx feedrate override During auto running the rapid traverse speed can be selected by pressing 0 001 0 01 0 1 l key The 4 gears override of FO 25 50 100 are available for the rapid traverse Note The rapid traverse speed value overriden by rapid override and number parameters No 088 No 089 No 090 can be obtained by following equation The actual rapid traverse speed of X axis the value set by parameter No 088xrapid override If the override is FO the axis stop is set by bit parameter No 12 4 If it is set for non stop O the actual rapid traverse speed is set by number parameter No 093 for all axes The actual rapid traverse speed of Y or Z axis
56. It has no instruction parameter The system default at power on is G17 plane if parameter is not specified It can also be set by bit parameter NO 31 1 2 3 The relation of the instruction and the plane is as following G1 XY plane G18 ZX plane G19 YZ plane Plane is not changed if G17 G18 G19 is not specified in the block For example G18 X Z ZX plane GOX Y Plane unchanged ZX plane In addition the moving instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection e g in the following instruction Y axis is not in the ZX plane so the Y axis moving is irrelevant to ZX plane G18Y_ Annotation Only the canned cycle in G17 plane is available in this system at present For criterion or astringency plane should be expressly defined in the corresponding block especially in a system used by many users which can avoid the incident or abnormity caused by programming error 4 2 13 Polar coordinate system setup cancel G16 G15 Format G16 G15 Function G16 is used for the setup of the polar coordinate system of the positioning parameter G15 is used for the cancellation of the polar coordinate system of the positioning parameter Explanation No command parameter If G16 is set the coordinate value can be input by polar coordinate radius and angle The positive of angle is the CCW direction of the 1 axis positive direction in a plane selected while the negative is CW direction Both the radius
57. M code controlled by PLC is in a same block with a move instruction they are executed simultaneously 5 1 1 Forward and reverse rotation instructions M03 M04 Instruction M3 M4 Sxxx Explanation Viewed from the positive Z axis to negative the spindle counterclockwise CCW rotation is defined as forward rotation clockwise CW as reverse rotation The instruction of Sx x x specifies the spindle speed it is the gear in gear mode Unit r min When it is controlled by frequency converter Sx x x specifies the actual speed e g S1000 specifies the spindle to rotate by a speed of 1000r min 154 CGSR I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 1 2 Spindle stop M05 Instruction M5 When M5 is executed in auto mode the spindle stops but the speed specified by S instruction is reserved The deceleration at spindle stop is set by the machine builder It is usually by energy consumption brake 5 1 3 Cooling on and off M08 M09 Instruction M8 M9 Itis used to control the the cooling pump If the miscellaneous functions are locked in auto mode this instruction is not executed 5 1 4 A axis release and clamping M10 M11 Instruction M10 M11 Itis used for A axis release and clamping 5 1 5 Tool release and clamping M16 M17 Instruction M16 M17 Itis used for tool release and clamping 5 1 6 Spindle orientation M19 Instruction M19 It is specified for spindle orientation which is used for tool chang
58. MANUAL 4 2 Simply G code 4 2 1 Rapid positioning G00 Format GOO X_Y Z Function G00 instruction moves the tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental instruction at a traverse speed by linear interpolation It is set by bit parameter NO 12 1 and uses the following two path Fig 4 2 1 1 1 Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation G01 The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed not more than the traverse speed of each axis 2 Nonlinear interpolation positioning The tool is positioned with the traverse speed of each axis respectively The tool path is usually not straight start position start position Non lingar interpolation positioning A Linear interpolation positioning End position End position Fig 4 2 1 1 Explanation 1 After GOO is executed the system change the tool current move mode for GOO mode The GOO parameter value is 0 or G01 parameter value is 1 default mode can be set by bit parameter No 031 0 while the power is switched on 2 The tool doesn t move if positioning parameter is not specified and the system only change the current tool move mode for GOO 3 G00 are identical with GO 4 G0 speed for X Y Z axis is set by number parameter P88 P92 Restrictions 1 The traverse speed is set by parameter if F is specified in GO instruction it is used for the followi
59. O O oooooooonono O m O O oO oOoOooOoOoOoOoOoO oO OO O O oO oOoOooOoOoOoOoOoO oO oO OO O DO Cm OO OOo 2 Oo Hi O lt a Oo CO CO oo oO CO CO OC CO OC CO OC OO OO oo oO Oo CO CO Oo GO Oo OO OO MDI INFO PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCDGN Fig 3 9 4 Note Refer to GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the PLC ladder modification and relevant message 3 10 Index display Press the key to display the alarm page there are 7 modes OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO PLCADDR CALCULA in this page which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 10 1 to Fig 3 10 7 1 OPRT interface In lt INDEX gt page press OPRT soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 5 INDEX INFO C OPERATION 000001 N00000 MDI data MDI mode input value gt Enter Search NO any mode press SER key gt NO gt Enter POS interface Rel coord clear rel coord interface X Y Z gt cancel Rel coord mediating REL interface X Y Z gt Enter PRT CNT clear REL or ABS interface CHG gt Enter RUN TIME clear REL or ABS CHG gt down key gt Enter MPG interrupt clear ALL interface X Y Z gt cancel PAR interface BITPAR PAR SWITCH ON MDI mode input value gt Enter Ln 01 120 S0000 T0000 EDI ALARM G CODEJ PARA MACRO gt P Fig 3 9 5 210 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL In lt I
60. Use the following instruction to perform the linear motion from the old vector of the start point to the end point in GOO G01 mode It performs linear movement from the old vector of start point to the end point In GOO mode the axes rapidly traverse to the end point By using this instruction the system enters into tool radius compensation cancel mode from tool radius compensation mode If G40 is specified without X__ Y___ no operation is performed by the tool Tool radius compensation left G41 1 In G00 G01 mode G41 X__Y__ D __ It specifies a new vector being vertical to the direction of X Y at the block end point The tool is moved from the tip of the old vector to the tip of the new one at the start point x Y New vector Tool center path start point Old a When the old vector is zero by this instuction the tool is switched to tool radius Programmed path compensation mode from tool offset cancel mode And the offset value is specified by D code 2 In G02 G03 mode 116 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G41 G02 G03 X_ Y_R_ By program above the new vector that is located on the line between the circle center and the end point can be made out From the arc advancing direction it points to the left right The tool center moves along an arc from the old vector tip to the new vector tip with the precondition that the old vector is has been made out The offs
61. X100 Y100 rapid positioning to the location X100 Y100 GO is the initial state G1 X0 YO F100 interpolate to location XO YO by straight line with the feedrate 100mm min G98 is the initial power on state Non modal means that the relevant address value is effective only in the block contains this address if it is used in following blocks it must be respecified e g G functional instructions of 00 group in Table 4 1 Refer to Table 3 4 for mode and non modal description for functional word Table 3 4 Mode and non modal for functional instruction A group of G functions that can be cancelled by each other once executed they are effective till they are cancelled by other G functions in the same group Modal G function A group of M functions that can be cancelled by each other once executed they are effective till they are cancelled by other G functions in the same group Non modal G They are only effective in the block they are specified function and cancelled at the block end Non modal 4 ia Non modal M They are only effective in the block they are specified function Modal M function _ 30 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 5 Decimal point programming Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point A decimal point can be used when entering a distance time or speed Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses X Y Z A B C J K R P Q a
62. Z R P Because all data are cancelled in Z R needs to be respecified and F that remains can be omitted P is saved but not needed in this block T X Z It is a hole machining with a different Z value to And CI eaan G89X Y Do the hole machining by G89 according to the data Z Ee specified in R Pin and F in G0O1X Y Cancel the hole machining mode and data A Absolute instruction and incremental instruction in canned cycle G90 G91 The change of G90 G91 along drilling axis is shown as Fig 4 4 2 Usually it is programmed by G90 if it is programmed by G91 Z and R are regarded as negative values 9 CSR P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 340 Absolute instruction G91 incremental instruction Point level Foint level Point Z level Point Z level A B Fig 4 4 2 B Return to initial level in canned cycle G98 G99 After the tool reaches the bottom of a hole it may return to the point R level or the initial level These operations can be specified by G98 and G99 Generally G99 is used for the 1 drilling operation and G98 is used for the last drilling operation The initial level does not change even drilling is performed in G99 mode The following figure illustrates the operation of G98 and G99 G98 is the system default mode G98 Return to initial level G99 Return to point R level Initial level A Initial level
63. by changing Alarm Press this key to enter To view alarm display pages by changing soft keys pew aug on eper eer eration PMC page Press this key to enter To view the corresponding system version the I O 171 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL pf by changing soft keys Index page Press this key to enter To view the corresponding system message by index page changing soft keys Note The pages by soft keys above can also be displayed by continuously pressing the corresponding functional keys Refer to Chapter 3 in this manual for the details of these pages 1 2 4 Control area TEP EC SA AAA Keys Function Remarks and explanation operation explanation Edit mode key To enter Edit mode Switching to Edit mode in Auto mode system slowing down to stop if current block is executed i oO co mi 3 pales Es Sia oe ajie itje jes kee s tg p alee HAF aE Auto mode key To enter Auto In this mode internal mode memory program is selected MDI mode key To enter MDI Switching to MDI mode mode in Auto mode system slowing down to stop if current block is executed Machine zero To enter Machine Switching to Machine mode key zero mode zero mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop Step mode key To enter Step Switching to Step mode mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop z JOG mode key To ent
64. for a distance d is performed in each intermittent feeding If G73 and M codes are specified in a same block M code is executed during the 1 hole positioning operation then the system goes on the next drilling operation If the repetition K is specified M code is only executed for the first hole Note 1 If parameter Q is not specified alarm address Q not found G73 G83 will be issued If Q value is specified for a negative the intermittent feed will be performed by the absolute value of Q Note 2 In canned cycle if the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level _ 86 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored Example 1 M3 1500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G73 X0 YO Z 15 R 10 Q5 F120 Positioning and drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 50 Positioning and drill hole 2 then return to point R level Y 80 Positioning and drill hole 3 then return to point R level X10 Positioning and drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y10 Positioning and drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y75 Positioning and drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference
65. function checks the tool overcutting in advance If the interference is dectected by grammar check function after the program is loaded alarm is issued The inteference check in tool radius compensation is set by bit parameter No 41 3 Primary conditions of interference 1 The tool path is different from the program path The included angle between paths is from 90 to 270 2 Except above conditions in arc machining the included angle between the start point and the end point of the tool center path is much different from that of the program path above 180 Example Tool center path Programmed path The directions of these two paths are different 180 SSS SS Tool center path Programmed path gt lt The directions of these two paths are different 180 12 Manual operation See the manual operation in Operation section for the manual tool radius compensation If the tool length compensation is performed in tool radius compensation the offset value of the tool radius is regarded to be changed 13 Precautions for offset Ca To specify offset value The offset value number is specified by D code Once specified D code is effective till another one is specified or offset is cancelled Besides the offset value for the tool radius compensation it 134 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL is also used for tool offset value b To change the of
66. gt PMC FO F63 D DATA TABLE DO D255 G PMC gt NC G0 G63 K KEEP RELAY KO K255 R INTE RELAY RO R511 A SEL DISP MSG AO A31 PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCDGN Fig 3 9 1 PLCGRA Ln 000 429 RUN X001 0 G020 0 G020 4 G020 5 G020 6 DATA MEA Emergency switch MDI INFO PLCGRAY PLCPAR PLCDGN Fig 3 9 2 208 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PLCPara ADDR N7 N 6 N5 N4 K000 K001 K002 K003 K004 K005 K006 K007 K008 K009 K010 K011 Data INFO PLCPara NO 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 gt O oS oO co Oo o oo oOo gt O gt o fo OO CO OG ooo oO OO Oo gt o 6 OO CO CO Cc Oo co 2 oO ADDRESS C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 C000 O gt o Oo Oo Oo oo oo o oo oOo 2 O Oo Oo Cc Oo Oo 2 N 3 N 2 N I CURRENT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 O CO CO Oo Oo CO eS OC OC Oo Oo Oo OO ooon Cc CO OC Oo oOo oS oO fo Co Oo ooo oO Oo MDI PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCDGN SET 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 RUN N 0 MDI INFO PLCGRA K PLCPAR PLCDGN Fig 3 9 3 209 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PLCDGN RUN ADDR N 7 N 6 N O N 4 N S N 2 N 11 N O F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 F005 F006 F007 F008 F009 F010 F011 oooooooooo
67. is moved out of the overtravel range 2 5 3 Release of the overtravel alarm The method for overtravel alarm is in JOG mode press the OVERTRAVEL key on the panel then move the axis out reversely for positive overtravel move negatively for negative overtravel move positively 179 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 Interface Display as well as Data Modification and Setting 3 1 Position display 3 1 1 Four types of position display POSTON Press key to enter the position page that includes four types REL LABS AII MONI They can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys as is shown in the following 1 Relative mode It displays the coordinate of the current tool in relative coordinate system by pressing REL soft key called relative in following see Fig 3 1 1 ACT POS RELATIVE 000001 005492 000014 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 PRG SPEED 500 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 500 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PART CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 CUT TIME 000 00 OO 0 10 06 00 Sx 100 S500000 T0010 MDI REL CABS ALL MONI Fig 3 1 1 Clearing steps of relative coordinate system press lt X gt key as X axis blinks press lt CANCEL gt key to clear the coordinate system and the same for Y and Z axes Setup steps of relative coordinate system press lt X gt key as X axis blinks input the setting data then press lt ENTER gt ke
68. is the signal sent to machine by PLC See GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 5 WAVE interface In lt DIAGNOSIS gt page press WAVE soft key to enter WAVE interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 5 NO 204 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL DIAGNOSE WAVE 000002 N0120 AXIS 0 Os ADL 12 2 Y 322 424 528 WAVE TYPE 2 0 Speed 1l Acc 2 Acc Acc HOR SCALE 5 VER SCALE 100 50000 T0100 DATA EDIT N C PMC NC MT 1 PMC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 5 Axis selection select the axis name for WAVE WAVE selection select the WAVE type Horizontal vertical scale select the WAVE scale ENTER Data in MDI mode move the cursor to select the data to be modified and press key for confirmation 3 2 Signal viewing MENKA 1 Press key to select the DIAGNOSE page 2 The respective address explanation and meaning are shown at the down left of the screen when moving the cursor to the left or right ENTER 3 Move the cursor or key in the parameter address to be searched then press key the target address will be found 4 In WAVE interface the feedrate acceleration acceleration of acceleration of each axis can be displayed It is easy to debug the system and find the optimum suited parameters for the drive and the motor 3 8 Alarm display When an alarm is issued ALARM is displayed at th
69. machine lock mirror image scaling functions during manual intervention 4 Processing and workpiece figure should be taken into consideration to prevent tool or machine damage prior to manual intervention The manual intervention operation is shown in the following figure 216 CGSB I HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 The N1 block cuts a workpiece Tool N2 Block start point Ni 2 The toolis stopped by pressing the feed hold key in the middle of the N1 block ipoint N2 Ni Point A _ After retracting the tool manually to point B tool movement is restarted qi Point B Manual intervention Ni Point A _ After automatic retum to point A the remaining move command of the N1 block is executed Ni Point A 4 2 Spindle control 4 2 1 Spindle CCW The spindle is started for CCW rotation if this key is pressed in JOG MPG Step mode after S speed is specified in MDI mode 4 2 2 Spindle CW ka The spindle is started for CW rotation if this key is pressed in Manual MPG Step mode after S speed is specified in MDI mode 217 CGS m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 2 3 Spindle stop The spindle is stopped if this key is pressed in Manual MPG Step mode 4 2 4 Spindle auto gear shift The frequency conversion control or gear control for spindle is set by the parameter No 1 2 If parameter No 1 2 1 the spindle auto gears are controlle
70. mm 294 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0198 Compensation step of 4TH axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0199 Compensation step of 5TH axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0200 Time constant of backlash compensation by 20 ascending and descending Setting range O 400 ms 0201 Delay time of strobe signals MF SF TF Setting range 0 9999 ms 0202 Width acceptable for M S T completion signal Setting range 0 9999 ms 0203 Output time of reset signal 200 Setting range 50 400 ms 0204 Bits allowable for M codes O 2 0205 Bits allowable for S codes O 6 U D e gt Q Q Q D U D Q Q gt Q D 0206 Bits allowable for T codes Setting range 0 4 0210 Incremental amount for automatic sequence number 10 insertion Setting range O 1000 0211 Tool offset heading number input disabled by MDI Setting range 0 9999 0212 Tool offset numbers input by MDI disabled Setting range O0 9999 0214 Setting range 0 1000 0 1000 mm Error limit of arc radius 0 05 295 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0216 Pitch error compensation number of X axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0217 Pitch error compensation number of Y axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0218 Pitch error compensation number of Z ax
71. mm X coordinate address 0 001 9999 999 S Dwell time 99999 999 99999 999 mm Y coordinate address 21 CGR I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL address Range O O meaning 99999 999 99999 999 mm Z coordinate address 99999 999 99999 999 mm Arc radius angle displacement 99999 999 99999 999 mm R level in canned cycle 99999 999 99999 999 mm Arc center vector in X axis relative to start Fee ee point point 0 99999 r min Spindle speed of es ee executing process subprogram calling 99999 999 99999 999 mm Cutting depth or hole bottom offset in canned cycle 4 01 99 Operator for G65 00 99 Length offset number 0O DO 00 99 Radius offset number Special attention should be paid that the limits in table 2 1 are all for CNC device but not for machine tool Therefore programming should be done on a basis of good understanding of the programming limitation of machine builder manual besides this manual 2 2 Common structure of a program The program are classified for main program and subprogram Generally the CNC system are acutated by the main program If the main program contains the subprogram call the CNC system acts by the subprogram If the subprogram contains the instruction of returning to main program the CNC system returns to the main program to go on execution The program execution sequence is shown as Fig 2 4 s2 a CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPE
72. moving speed is identical with the JOG feedrate Wu RAPID 2 The rapid override is effective after the key is pressed for rapid traverse 5 2 Step interruption While the program running in Auto MDI DNC mode is shifted to Step mode by dwell the control will execute the step interruption The coordinate system of step interruption is consistent with that of MPG and the operation of it is also the same as that of MPG See details in the Section 6 2 Controlling in MPG interruption The step interruption coordinate system clearing steps press CTRL X till X flickers then press lt CANCEL gt key the coordinate system will be cleared The operations of Y Z are the same as above while the zero returning is being performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step mode The auxiliary control in Step mode is the same as that in JOG mode See details in section 4 2 and 4 3 of this manual 221 CGSB IF HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 6 MPG Operation 6 1 MPG feed Press key to enter the MPG mode in this mode the machine movement is controlled by a handwheel 6 1 1 Moving amount selection he mo ng incremen be displa ed a key in t S Fi h P n ment in lt P nterf pressed e g If press l key it displays the MPG increment in lt POSITION gt interface 0 100 See Fig 6 1 1 ACT POS RELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0
73. not included in offset plane PO S90 E N oes G code only 6 G01 G91 X0 eee Move distance is zero a Specified at offset start If the tool movement is not made by the start up block it will be done by the next moving instruction block by the system 131 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL GAGN areas ete NB x1000 0 1000 0 N7 G41 x0 ao i Nex 1000 0 M9 x1 000 0 1000 0 gt Tool center path Programmed path b Specified at offset mode If a block with no tool movement is exclusively specified in offset mode the vector and the tool center path are identical with that the block is not specified Refer to item 3 Offset mode And this block is executed at the single block stop position Ni Mis NGA TOO 200 0 NF 04 100 0 Na lt 100 0 ra H Block N7 is executed here However when the block moving amount is 0 the tool movement is identical with that of the two or more blocks containing no moving instruction even only one block is specified My Mis No G3Ix1000 YOU MO Nas 1000 Note The blocks above are executed in G1 G41 mode and the path in GO doesn t conforms to the figure c Specified with the offset cancel A vector with a length offset and the direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the previous block is formed when the block specified together with offset cancel contains no tool movement and it will be cancelled
74. of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0017 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0018 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54 _4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0019 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0020 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0021 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 279 CGSB m HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0022 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55 _Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0023 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_ 4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0024 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0025 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0026 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0027 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999
75. operation is stopped optionally after a block containing M01 is executed If the optional stop on off is set for ON M01 is equivalent to MOO if the optional stop on off is set for OFF M01 is ineffective See OPERATION MANUAL for its operation 5 2 4 Subprogram calling M98 This code is used to call a subprogram in the main program See the PROGRAMMING Section 2 2 Common structure of a program for details 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 1 In auto mode if M99 is used at the end of the main program the control returns to the 156 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL program beginning to continue automatic operation after the block containing M99 is executed The blocks followed are not to be executed and the number of the workpieces machined is not accumulated 2 If M99 is used at the end of a subprogram the control returns to the the main program block containing M98 after the block containing M99 is executed 157 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 6 S codes for Spindle Function The code signal converted to analog signal by S code and the numerical value followed is sent to the machine to control the machine spindle S is a modal value 6 1 Spindle analog control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 0 the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage specified by address S and the numerical value followed See details about it in OPERATION
76. point M5 Spindle stop M30 Note The chip removal operation is still performed though Q is omitted in the machining of the holes from 2 to 6 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 Format G8141X YZ RFK Function Itis used for normal drilling feed to the hole bottom then the tool rapidly retracts from the hole bottom Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R level F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats if necessary _ 87 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G81 G98 G81 G99 Initial level n Point R Point R po R level Point Z 4 Point Z Z R The hole bottom parameter Z and R must be correctly specified while performing the 1 drilling operation omitting unallowable or the alarm occurs If parameter P Q are specified they are ignored by system After positioning along X and Z axes the tool traverses to point R level to perform the drilling from point R level to point Z level then retracts rapidly The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G81 is specified If G81 and M code are specified in a s
77. point in X Y plane as the polar coordinate system origin G81 X100 0 Y30 0 Z 20 0 R 5 0 F200 0 To specify 100mm distance and 30 angle Y150 To specify 100mm distance and 150 angle Y270 To specify 100mm distance and 270 angle G15 G80 To cancel the polar coordinate system To specify angle by incremental value polar radius by absolute value 53 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G17 G90 G16 To specify the polar coordinate system and take the workpiece coordinate system zero point in X Y plane as the polar coordinate system origin G81 X100 0 Y30 0 Z 20 0 R 5 0 F200 0 To specify 100mm distance and 30 angle G91 Y120 To specify 100mm distance and 150 angle Y120 To specify 100mm distance and 270 angle G15 G80 To cancel the polar coordinate system Moreover when programming by polar coordinate system the current coordinate plane setting should be considered And the polar coordinate plane and the current coordinate plane are relevant e g in G91 mode if the current coordinate plane is specified by G17 the origin of it is defined by the X Y axis components of the current tool position If the current coordinate plane is specified by G18 the origin of it is defined by the Z X axis components of the current tool position Specified position Specified position Radiu Angle Actual position Actual position When the angle is specified When the angle is specified with an absolute instruc
78. restart the program if M99 is at the end of the subprogram the control returns to the program that calls the subprogram M30 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 for returning to the program beginning and M02 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 for returning to the program beginning 95 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 Programming Fundamentals 3 1 Controlled axis Table 3 1 Basic controlled axes 3 axes X Y Z Extended controlled axes total 3 2 Axis name The 3 primary axis names are always X Y or Z And the controlled axes are set by number parameter No 5 The additional axis names are set by number parameter No 6 accordingly such as A B C 3 3 Coordinate system 3 3 1 Machine coordinate system A special point on machine used as machine benchmark is called machine zero which is set by the machine builder The coordinate system set by machine zero taken as origin is called machine coordinate system It is set up by manual machine zero return after power is on Once set it remains unchanged till the power off system reset or emergency stop This system uses right hand Cartesian coordinate system The motion along spindle is Z axis motion Viewed from spindle the motion of headstock approaching the workpiece is negative Z axis motion and departing for positive The other directions are determined by right hand Cartesian coordinate system 3 3 2 Reference point There is a
79. see Fig 2 1 The blocks are separated by program end code see Fig 2 1 In this manual the block end code is represented by character Address N with 4 figures sequence number behind it can be used at the beginning of the block see Fig 2 1 and the leading zero can be omitted The sequence of the sequence number insertion set by bit parameter No 0 5 can be arbitrary and the intervals between them can be inequal set by Parameter P210 Sequence number can be either in all blocks or in some important blocks But by common machining sequence the number should be arranged by ascending That the sequence number is placed in important part of the program is for convenience e g in tool changing or worktable indexed to a new plane 2 1 3 Instruction word Word is a factor to block composition It is formed by an address and figures behind it sometimes added before figures x l Address Mumber Word Fig 2 3 Word composition The address is a character from English alphabetic table which defines the meaning of the figure behind it In this system the usable addresses and their meaning as well as value range are shown as Table2 1 Sometimes an address has a different meaning for different preparatory function If 2 or more identical addresses appear in an instruction the alarm for it will be set by parameter NO 32 6 Table 2 1 TAdaress Range O O weaning Co ow OO Progamm 99999 999 99999 999
80. special point on CNC machine tool for tool change and coordinate system setup which is called reference point It is a fixed point in machine coordinate system set by machine builder By reference point return the tool can easily move to this position Generally this point in CNC milling system coincides with the machine zero while the reference point of Machine Center is usually the tool change point 2G CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Reference position Tool There are two methods to traverse the tool to reference point 1 Manual reference point return see Manual reference point return in Operation Manual 2 Auto reference point return 3 3 3 Workpiece coordinate system The coordinate system used for workpiece machining is called workpiece coordinate system or part coordinate system which is preset by CNC system i y Program x x Coordinate system Part drawing CNC Instructian Machine tool In order to make the tool to cut the workpiece to the figure on drawing by instruction program according to drawing in the workpiece coordinate system specified by CNC the relation of the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system must be a OF CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL determined The method to determine the relation of these two coordinate systems is called alignment It can be done by different methods such as
81. srera r Ea iiaae a 44 4 2 6 Unidirectional positioning G60 sssssssssssseseeeneesssssssssssssseseeterresssssssssssssseeerrereeessssssssssses 44 4 2 7 System parameter online modification G10 sssessssssssoosseseeereressssssssssssssserrerreesssssssssssse 45 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 sneeeessssesssssssssseteerrressssssssssssseeeterereessssssssssssssses 46 4 2 9 Additional workpiece Coordinate system cccccccccccceecceeeceaaeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeesees 48 4 2 10 Machine coordinate system Selection G53 cccccccccccccetssssessseseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeees 49 ADA Floatine coordinate systemi O 2siessoseiosne nee 50 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 wc ccccccccecessssssesssnnneeeeeeeeeeeesseeeesesssnnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeanes 52 4 2 13 Polar coordinate system setup cancel G16 G15 0 ec ccccseseessseeeccececeeeeeceaaaaaeseseeseeeeeeees 52 4 2 14 Scaling in plane G51 GIO usdeitcacunsesicanccwaiensamesiawalsdaatslawelionsansualiadanseansuqnvelantaweniasnansninatennieaghest 54 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 GO9 cc cccccccccccssssssseesssseseeeeeeceeeeeseeeseaaaaeessseeeseeeeeeees 58 4 2 16 Skip function G31 oo eee ccccccssesccccccceeeeeeeaaaeeeeessseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeessesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaaaaeeeeseees 62 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G2 Mos scitec esos cceecticecenaaceseonectitieeeaacetoc euesticeeeeeaceie siiente innsin anhaa 63 4 2 18 Optional angle
82. system B 9 2 Steps for machine zero 1 Press MH to enter Machine Zero mode the characters machine zero will be displayed at the down right of the LCD screen 2 Select the axis X Y or Z for machine zero and its direction is set by bit parameter No 7 3 NO 7 5 3 The machine moves towards the machine zero Before the deceleration point is reached the machine traverses rapidly traverse speed set by number parameter No 100 No 102 then moves to the machine zero point i e reference point by a speed of FL set by number parameter No 099 if the machine touches the deceleration switch As the machine zero is reached the corresponding axis moving stops and the Machine Zero indicator lights up 9 3 Machine zero steps by program After the bit parameter No 4 3 is set for 0 the machine zero can be specified by G28 instruction Because it detects the stroke tongue this instruction is equivalent to manual machine zero Note 1 If the machine zero is not fixed on your machine don t perform the machine zero operation Note 2 The indicator of the corresponding axis lights up when the machine zero is finished 236 CGaSGR I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Note 3 The indicator is gone out on condition that the axis is moved out from the machine zero by the operator Note 4 Refer to the machine builder s manual for the direction of the machine zero reference point 237 CGSB I HIS G
83. system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL QO COCO Subprogram number Subprogram Hoo Subprogram end Write out the subprogram number behind the address O at the subprogram beginning and the M99 instruction at the subprogram end M99 format as above 2 2 2 Subprogram call The subprogram is called out for execution by the main program or the subprogram The instruction format is as following mog PLLETTI L HH Mao ooo a Repetition count Po Subprogram number e f the repeat time is omitted the default is 1 Example M98 P1002L5 It means No 1002 subprogram is continuously called for 5 times e M98 P__ canntbe in a block with movement instruction e Execution sequence of subprogram call from main program Main program Subprogram NOOIO wee fod onto POE E HIDO H0020 W95 PIOLOUL MIUSO eee NOUS M1040 NOOS0 W98 PF10100 RUN es eee eee NODD a u lt N1ld60 Mog Subprogram call from subprogram are identical with that from main program Note Alarm PS 078 occurs if subprogram number specified by address P is not found 94 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 2 2 3 Program end The program begins with program name ends with M02 M30 or M99 see Fig 2 2 For the end code MO2 M30 or M99 detected in program execution if M02 M30 specifies the end the program finishes and reset if M99 specifies the end the control returns to the program beginning to
84. tapping axis 1st gear Setting range O 400 ms 0299 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and tapping axis 2nd gear Setting range 0 400 ms 0300 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and tapping axis 3rd gear Setting range O 400 ms 0302 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 1st gear Setting range O 400 ms 0303 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 2nd gear Setting range O 400 ms 0304 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 3rd gear Setting range O 400 ms 0306 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 1st gear Setting range 0 9999 0307 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range O0 9999 0308 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 9999 0310 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 1st gear OO 301 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Setting range 0 9999 9999 0311 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range 0 9999 9999 0312 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 9999 9999 0314 Spindle in position width in rigid tapping Setting range O 100 0315 Tapping axis in position width in rigid tapping Setting range O 100
85. the data in memory are input or output the code selected 1 ISO code 0 EIA code Note Use ISO code if GSK218M universal programmer is used Inch programming Set the input unit of the program for inch or mm 1 inch 0 mm I O channel To be set by user by requirement 5 Absolute programming 6 1 Absolute programming 0 Incremental programming Automatic sequence number 0 The number is not inserted by system automatically when inputting program by keyboard in Edit mode 1 The number is inserted automatically by system when inputting program by keyboard in Edit mode The number increment of blocks can be set by number 194 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL parameter No 0210 7 Stop number This function can be used to specify the program execution to stop at a block specified but the program number and the block number should be specified together for this function E g 00060 program number means program number O00060 00100 sequence number means block number N00100 ENTER d Press key to confirm the entry 3 5 2 Parameter and program on off page 1 Press SWITCH soft key to enter switch setting page The page is shown as following see Fig 3 5 2 SETTING 000002 N0120 PAR SWITCH OFF ON PAR SWITCH OFF ON S0000 T0100 EDIT SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 2 2 Operation explanation In page above the user can set the para
86. the operation Programmed path stops An alarm is generated and the operation stops here in single block operation lf the CNC does not stop overcutting occurs When machining a groove smaller than the tool radius since the tool redius offset forces the path of the tool center to move in the reverse of the programmed direction overcutting will result Tool center path iek an is displayed and the operation Overcutting if the operation would not stop 3 Machining a step smaller than the tool radius When machining a slot smaller than the tool radius specified by circular machining in the case of a program containing this step the tool center path with the common offset becomes reverse to the programmed direction In this case the first vector is ignored and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position This single block operation is stopped at this point If the machining is not in the single block mode the auto run is continued If the step is linear no alarm will be issued and the tool cuts correctly But uncut part will remain Linear movement Stop position after execution of a single block i Tool center path Programmed path Pees wt Whee Cape Dg mig ge a gests a Fee A Y NN Are machining rc center An overcutting will result if the first vector is not ignored Te first vector is ignored 136 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Starting tool radius compens
87. to enter JOG mode T 4 Press _ key to enter Auto mode 5 Press key to execute the program automatically Note Before execution confirm the current coordinate point to be the end of the block preceding to the block to be executed confirmation of the current coordinate point is unnecessary if the block to be executed is absolute programming and contains G00 G01 If the block to be executed is tool change operation etc ensure that the interference between the tool and the workpiece at current position which may cause machine damage or personnel hurt will not occur 228 CGSB I H1S GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 7 9 Dry run Before the program execution a dry run can be performed to have a check for the program which is usually used together with MACHINE LOCK M S T LOCK a i Press key to enter Auto mode press key the Dry Run indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is DRY RUN In rapid feed the program speed is dry run speed x rapid override In cutting feed the program speed is dry run speed x feedrate override Note 1 The dry run speed is set by the number parameter No 86 2 The effectiveness of dry run in cutting feed is set by the bit parameter No 12 6 3 The effectiveness of dry run in rapid positioning is set by the bit parameter No 12 7 7 6 Single block running Single Block can be selected for checking a block execution MERKE key T
88. 0 Axes moving direction are not identical with MPG rotation direction Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number MMDI OP7 OP6 OP1 0 5 7 OP1 1 0 OP6 1 0 OP7 1 0 MMDI 1 0 Mode selection by soft keys enabled Mode selection by soft keys disabled Block skip single block machine lock and dry run operation by soft keys enabled Block skip single block machine lock and dry run operation by soft keys disabled Cycle start and dwell operation by soft keys enabled Cycle start and dwell operation by soft keys disabled Panel keyboard can be replaced by soft keyboard Panel keyboard can not be replaced by soft keyboard Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 8 MOA 1 0 MOU 1 0 mou woa Outputting all when program restarts Outputting the last M S T B codes when program restarts To output M S T B codes when program restarts Not output M S T B codes when program restarts Standard setting 0000 0000 276 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL System parameter number 059 OTOP AOV DEC OHPG OHPG 1 Feed by external handwheel 0 Feed not by external handwheel DEC 1 Use external deceleration 0 Not use external deceleration AOV 1 Use automatic corner override 0 Not use au
89. 0 Editting of Subprogram with the number 90000 99999 allowed CPD 1 ENTER key needed when deleting programs 0 ENTER key unneeded when deleting programs PSK 1 Search for programs protected effective 0 Search for programs protected ineffective Standard setting 0001 0001 System parameter number o 28 ime mel MKP 1 To clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode 0 Not clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode MCL 1 To delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode 0 Not delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 0o29 MCm Wz wzo mcv GOF woF_ WOF 1 Tool wear offset input by MDI disabled 0 Tool wear offset input by MDI enabled GOF 1 Geometric tool offset input by MDI disabled 0 Geometric tool offset input by MDI enabled MCV 1 Macro variables input by MDI disabled 0 Macro variables input by MDI enabled WZO 1 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI enabled IWZ 1 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell enabled MCM 1 Custom macro input by MDI MDI type 0 Custom macro input by MDI any type Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 0 ABS MAB DPI
90. 0 0000 travel detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0085 Positive 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0086 Dry run speed 5000 Setting range O0 9999 9999 mm min 0087 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min Cutting feedrate at power on 300 285 CGSB I HISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0088 5000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min 0089 Rapid traverse speed along Y axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min 0090 Rapid traverse speed along Z axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min 0091 Rapid traverse speed along 4TH axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min 0092 Rapid traverse speed along 5TH axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm min 0093 FO rapid override of axis for all axes 30 Setting range O 1000 mm min 0094 Maximum feedrate for all axes 8000 Setting range O 9999 mm min Maximum speed in non forecast control mode Rapid traverse speed along X axis 0095 Minimum feedrate for all axes Setting range O 500 mm min Minimum speed in non forecast control mode 0096 Maximum speed in forecasting control mode for all 6000 axes Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0097 Minimum speed in forecasting control mode for all axes Setting range O 500 mm min 0098 Feedrate of manual continuous feed for axes JOG 2000 Setting range O 5000 mm min 0099 Speed FL of referen
91. 0 012 0 0 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 00000000 023 O O oO oC So oO O O gt Ko 1 gt XS XO OO O O kr gt XS HO Ks O O a a a a e s O O eo ee a a e s O O O oO oOoOoOooooOo oO O O O a a a a OO hml eml eml O O O oe Ss os ss O m e O O ObO KO gt gt XS oO em O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O 4S SS oS tS OS oO O O O O O oOooOoooOo oO oO es O O O Co OO Ot ss Os O O oO Mm O O oO DO ma OO RS ee a es O O WY 0000 T0100 EDIT N C PMC NC MT 1 PMC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 3 This is the signal sent to PLC by machine See GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 4 PLC gt MT interface In lt DIAGNOSIS gt page press PLC gt MT soft key to enter PLC gt MT interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 4 DIAGNOSE PMC MT 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000 0 012 0 0 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 00000000 023 NO O O a a oOo O 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O O oO a a a sss O O O a as SS a O m eme O O O to a eo eS 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O gt SO SO oOo SC O O SS eS eS XS OS oOoO O O lt lt t O O OS OS OO OO SS ct OO 2 OO oO OS oS as O ee O O oOooOoooOo oOo oO a O N 0000 T0100 EDIT N C PMC NC MT PMC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 4 This
92. 000 WHEEL INC G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 Docu Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MPG REL ABS ALL MONI Fig 6 1 1 6 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction In MPG mode select the moving axis to be controlled by handwheel press the corresponding key then the axis can be moved by handwheel A A In MPG mode if X axis is to be controlled by handwheel press Xx key then X axis can be moved by rotating the handwheel See Fig 6 1 2 222 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL ACT POS RELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 WHEEL INC 0 100 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 OO Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 10 06 00 MDI REL ABS ALL MONT Fig 6 1 2 The MPG feed direction is decided by the handwheel rotation direction See details in the machine builder s manual Usually the CW of handwheel is the positive feed CCW for negative feed 6 1 3 Explanation of MPG feed 1 The relation of the handwheel scale and the machine moving amount are as following table Moving amount of a handwheel scale Paar t mm Machi amount mm 2 The value in the table varies with the mechanical transmission See details in the machine builder s manual 3 The speed of
93. 15 44 These 6 workpiece coordinate systems are set up by the distances from machine zero to each coordinate system origin ka YYorkpiece zero offset y Machine zero Example N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 Y20 N20 G56 X80 5 225 5 For the example above when N10 block is being executing it rapidly traverses to a position X 100 Y 20 in G55 workpiece coordinate system When N20 block is being executing the absolute coordinate value automatically turns to the coordinate value X 80 5 Z 25 5 in G55 workpiece coordinate system for rapid positioning to 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system Except 6 workpiece coordinate system standard workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 50 additional workpiece coordinate system can be used Format G54 Pn Pn specified additional workpiece coordinate system code Range 1 50 The setting and restriction of the additional workpiece coordinate system are the same as that of workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 The workpiece zero offset in additional workpiece coordinate system can be set by G10 as 48 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL following By instruction G10L20Pn XYZ Pn 0 The workpiece zero offset code for workpiece coordinate system specified n 1 to 50 Additional workpiece coordinate system code XYZ Set axis address and offset value for workpiece zero offset For absolute instruction G90 the value specified is the new of
94. 29 S before a tapping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in a block that contains a tapping instruction If G74 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next tapping operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is 107 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the tapping axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Alarm occurs if the tapping axis is changed in rigid mode If S and axis movement instructions are specified between M29 and G74 alarm is issued If M29 is specified in a tapping cycle alarm is also issued The thread lead is obtained from the expression feedrate spindle speed Feedrate of Z axis spindle speedxthread lead Example Spindle speed1000r min Thread lead1 0mm Then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 1000mm min G00 X120 Y100 Positi
95. 65 H11 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 3 for 011 and the operation result is 100 7 G65 H12 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 3 for 011 and the operation result is 100 1 150 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 7 4 Examples for custom macro 1 Bolt hole cycle To drill N equal spaced holes on the circumference of the circle with the center regarded as the basic point X0 YO radius R and the initial angle A Radius R X0 YO is the coordinate of the basic point in bolt hole cycle R radius A initial angle N Number Parameters above using the following variables 500 X coordinate value of basic point X0 501 Y coordinate value of basic point Y0 502 Radius R 503 Initial angle A 504 Number If N gt 0 for N holes in CCW direction If N lt 0 for N holes in CW direction The following variables are used for the operation in macro 100 For the counting of the hole machining i 101 The final value of the counting N IE 102 The angle of the i thhole 81 103 X coordinate of the i th hole Xi 104 Y coordinate of the i th hole Yi The custom macro body can be programmed as following 09010 N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q O i 0 G65 H22 P 101 Q 504 IE N N200 G65 H04 P 102 Q 100 R3600 00 G65 H05 P 102 Q 102 R 504 8i A 360 xI N 151 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MAN
96. AL Example G65 H01 P 201 Q1005 201 1005 G65 H01 P 201 Q 210 201 210 G65 H01 P 201 Q 202 201 202 2 Addition l1 J K G65 H02 P I Q J R K Example G65 H02 P 201 Q 202 R15 201 202 15 3 Subtraction I J K G65 H03 P I Q J R K Example G65 H03 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 203 4 Multiplication 1 Jx K G65 H04 P I Q J R K Example G65 H04 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202x 203 5 Division 1 J K G65 H05 P I Q J R K Example G65 H05 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 203 6 Logic addition OR lI1 J OR K G65 H11 P I Q J R K Example G65 H11 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 OR 203 7 Logic multiplication AND 1 J AND K G65 H12 P I Q J R K Example G65 H12 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 AND 203 8 AND OR 1 J XOR K G65 H13 P I Q J R K Example G65 H13 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 XOR 203 9 Square root 1 vV J G65 H21 P l Q J Example G65 H21 P 201 Q 202 201 V 202 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 P I Q J Example G65 H22 P 201 Q 202 201 202 11 Rounding 1 J TRUNC J K x K TRUNC reserving or abnegating decimal portion G65 H23 P l Q J R K Example G65 H23 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 TRUNC 202 203 x 203 12 Algorism to binary 1 BIN J G65 H24 P I Q J Example G65 H24 P 201 Q 202 201 BIN 202 148 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL
97. AL input mode section 4 Operation and transfer instruction G65 Format G65 Hm P i Q j R k m 01 99 represent the operation or transfer function i Variable name for saving operation result j Variable name 1 for operation Or a common which is expessed directly without k Variable name 2 for operation Or a common Significance i j o k __________ Operation sign specified by Hm Example P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 P 100 Q 101 R15 100 101 o 15 P 100 Q 100 R 102 100 100 o 102 H code specified by G65 has no effect to the offset selection 146 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL ees He fiain Logic addition O i OR k Logic multiplication i j AND k AND AND OR j XOR k Square root i Compound ix j E e PARON ol Ges Hos fs Se e pmen __ fr EARR 665 H22 Ges H23 jc 665 H24 ee Compound sack root VAT tik w Se f er a S ee a Unconditional a N transfer Conditional transfer IF j GOTO N Conditional transfer IF k GOTO N Conditional transfer IF gt k GOTO N ne i jxSIN C Conditional transfer IF lt k GOTO N Conditional transfer IF j 2 k GOTO N Conditional transfer IF j lt k GOTO N 1 Variable assignment 1 J G65 H01 P I Q J Operation instruction 147 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANU
98. ANUAL Restriction Attention should be paid to the coordinate plane selection set when the helical interpolation is being done 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Format G90 G91 Function There are 2 instructions for axis moving the absolute instruction and the incremental instruction The absolute instruction is a method of programming by the axis moving end point coordinate which is concerned with coordinate system Refer to section 3 3 1 3 3 4 The incremental instruction is a method of programming by the axis relative moving The incremental value is irrelevant with the coordinate system concerned it only uses moving direction and distance of the end point relative to the start point The absolute instruction and the incremental instruction are specified by G90 and G91 respectively End point Start point o i Li 40 0 ino 0 Fig 2 4 3 1 For the moving from start point to end point in Fig 2 4 3 1 the programming by absolute instruction G90 and incremental instruction G91 are as follows G90 GO X40 Y70 or G91 GO X 60 Y40 The action can be performed by both programming methods that can be expediently used by operator Explanation gt No instruction parameter It can be written into the block with other instructions gt G90 and G91 are the same group mode i e if G90 is specified while G91 not the mode is G90 default If G91 specified while G90 not the mode is G91 System par
99. D OPERARION MANUAL 5 The clearing of Y and Z axes are the same as above 3 2 Program display PROGRAM Press key to enter program display that have 5 modes PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT and DIR They can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 2 1 as following 1 Program display Press PRG soft key to enter program page in this mode a page of the blocks being executed in the memory can be displayed See Fig 3 2 1 PROGRAM 000002 N0120 000002 N0060 X100 N0120 x0 N0240 N0300 N0360 N0420 N0180 N0180 G41 X100 DI GOl Y100 G02 X200 R50 GOl YO F2500 XO Y50 DATA Ln 50000 T0100 EDIT MDI KCUR MOD CUR NXT DIR PROGRAM OOOO002 HOOGO HO120 HO2Z40 HOSO0 HOS6O HO420 HO1e0 HO1e0 DATA ald ole G41 4100 Di c i Y1O0 g z 200 Roo w l YO Fesoo a0 Tad Press softkey PRG again it enters the program EDIT and modification page see Fig 3 2 2 agog N0120 SOOOO TOO EDIT EB EDIT EB LOGIN ECHECE SAVE ERETURN Fig 3 2 2 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Press P key to enter next page lt REPLASE CUT COPY I PASTE RETURN gt Press P key to enter next page lt RSTR RETURN Press lt 4 key to return to last page Note The CHECK function can only be performed in Auto mode B EDIT jand B LOGIN lare used only in AUTO and DNC mode background edit funct
100. GSK 218M CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Gok r Misi 2s BBR 2 a gt SK CNC EQUIPMENT co LTD CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL i The user manual describes all items concerning the operation of this AC servo motor in detail as much as possible However it s impractical to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary and or unavailable operations on the motor due to the limit of the manual specific operations of the product and other causes Therefore the operations not specified in this manual may be considered impossible or unallowable ae This manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Company profile GSK GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd is the largest production and marketing enterprise of the CNC system in China currently It is the Numerical Control industrial base of South China and the undertaking enterprise of the 863 national main project Industrialization Support Technology for Medium Numerical Control System as well as one of the 20 basic equipment manufacture enterprises in Guangdong province It has been taking up the research and devel
101. H axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0074 Negative 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0075 Positive 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0076 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 284 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0077 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0078 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0079 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0080 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0081 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0082 Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 0 0000 travel detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0083 Positive 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 0 0000 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0084 Negative 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage
102. I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Toal A L15 60 40 C10 30 20 Move the tool from point A to point B using the B coordinate in G54 workpiece coordinate system the instruction is as following G90 G54X10 Y30 Z20 2 Relative coordinate It is the target position coordinate relative to the current position by taking the current position as the origin Tool For traversing the tool from point A to point B the instruction is as following GO G91 X 40 Y 30 Z 10 _29 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 4 Mode and non mode The mode means that the address value set by a block is effective till it is reset by another block Another significance of it is that if a functional word is set it doesn t need to be input again if it is used in the following blocks gt e g for following program GO X100 Y100 rapid positioning to the location X100 Y100 X20 Y30 rapid positioning to the location X120 Y30 GO specified by mode can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 interpolate to location X50 Y50 by straight line with the feedrate 300mm min G0 G1 X100 interpolate to location X100 Y50 by straight line with the feedrate 300mm min G1 Z50 F300 are all specified by mode and can be omitted GO X0 YO rapid positioning to the location XO YO The initial state is the default state after the system power on See table 4 1 gt For following program 000001
103. I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 G86 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 Format G87 XYZRQF Function It is used for accurate boring Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Q Offset of the hole bottom F Cutting feedrate G87 698 699 Oriented spindle dwell Spindle dwell Initial level LE onmo Spinde ce Spindle dwel Point Z After positioning along X and Y axis the tool is stopped after spindle orientation And the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip positioning is performed at the hole bottom point R level Then the tool is moved in the tool tip direction and the spindle is ro
104. I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a Fig 4 2 11 2 As fig 4 2 11 2 shows for G92 X25 3 Z23 take the position the tool locates at as the point X25 3 Z23 in the floating coordinate system 2 By a fixed point in the arbor as a basic point Basic point 1200 4e 2 Fig 4 2 11 3 As Fig 4 2 11 3 shows specify the workpiece coordinate system by block G92 X600 Y1200 by a basic point in the arbor as a start point Regarding a basic point as the start point if the motion is specified by the absolute value in the program the basic point is moved to the specified position and it must be added the tool length compensation value which is the difference of the basic point to the tool nose Note 1 If G92 is used for coordinate system setting in tool offset the coordinate system is the one set by G92 as to the tool length compensation without the offset value added Note 2 For tool radius compensation the tool offset should be cancelled if G92 is used Restriction After floating coordinate system is set the 1 canned cycle instruction should be in a complete format or the tool move will be wrong 5 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 Format G17 G18 G19 Function For circular interpolation tool radius compensation drilling or boring plane selection is needed which can be selected by G 17 G18 G19 Explanation
105. I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 Press POWER OFF button to turn off the power Power cut off at emergency The power should be cut off immediately to prevent from incident in emergency situation during the machine running And the zero return and tool setting should be performed again because of the error between the system coordinate and actual coordinate of the position after power off Note Refer to the machine builder s manual for turning off the power of the machine 2 3 Safety operations 2 3 1 Reset operation The system is in reset mode after pressing key 1 All axes movement stops 2 The M S functions are ineffective 3 Whether to save G codes or not after modifying bit parameters N35 1 N35 7 and N36 0 N36 7 and resetting 4 Whether to clear F H D codes or not after modifying bit parameters N34 7 and resetting 5 Whether to delete the program or not after modifying bit parameters N28 7 and resetting in MDI mode 6 Whether to clear the executing DNC program display or not after modifying bit parameters N23 2 and resetting 7 Whether to cancel local coordinate or not after modifying bit parameters N10 3 and resetting 8 Whether to clear the macro common variables 0 99 or not after modifying bit parameters N52 6 and resetting It can be used in system abnormal output and coordinate axis action 2 3 2 Emergency stop If the emergency button is pressed during machine running the syst
106. MANUAL iy Feedrate in X axis Fy T x f l at Feedrate in Y axis F 3 xf l F Feedrate in Z axis F gt f L L aj E a Fig 4 2 2 1 Note 1 The instruction parameters except F are all positioning parameter And the upper limit of the feedrate F can be set by number parameter P94 If the actual feedrate using override exceeds the upper limit it is restricted to the upper limit and its unit is mm min The lower limit of the feedrate F can be set by number parameter P95 If the actual federate using override exceeds the lower limit it is restricted to the lower limit and its unit is mm min 2 If the positioning parameter behind G01 is not specified the tool doesn t move and the system only changes the tool current mode for G 01 mode The system default mode at power on can be set for G00 value is 0 or G01 value is 1 by altering the system bit parameter NO 31 0 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 A Circular interpolation G02 G03 Prescriptions for G02 G03 The plane circular interpolation means that the arc path is to be finished by the specified rotation and radius or circle center from the start point to the end point in the specified plane Because the arc path can t be defined only by the start point and the end point other conditions are needed gt Arc rotation direction G02 G03 gt Circular interpolation plane G17 G18 G19 gt Circle center coordinate or radius whic
107. MDI or be assigned by an computation during custom macro body execution Multiple variables can be used in custom macro and they are differentiated by their variable numbers 1 Variable representation The variable is expressed by a sign followed by a variable number format Hi i 1 2 3 4 e g 5 109 1005 2 Variable citation The variable can be used to replace the value of parameter e g F 103 When 103 15 itis the same as F15 G 130 When 103 3 itis the same as G3 Note 1 Variable cann t be cited by parameter word O and N program number and sequence number Such as O 100 N 120 are not permitted in programming Note 2 Variable exceeding the max limit of the parameter can t be used When 30 120 M 30 exceeds the max limit of the instruction Note 3 Display and setting of variable It can be displayed on LCD or be set by MDI 2 Typies of variables Variables are classified into local variables common variables and system variables with different applications and characteristics 1 Local variables 1 50 They can only be used for data storage in a macro such as the results of operations When the power is turned off they are initialized for null When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables 2 Common variables 100 199 500 999 They can be shared among the main program and the custom macros called by the main program Namely the variable l in a custom macro pro
108. MIRROR X 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Y 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Z 0 OFF 1 ON CODE 0 EIA 1 ISO IN UNIT O MM 1 INCH I O CHAN C 0 3 CHANNEL NO ABS PRG CO ABS 1 INC AUTO SEQ CO OFF 1 ON SEQ STOP 0000 PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP 0000 SEQUENCE NO 2006 Y 11 M 14 D 14 H 26 M 45 S DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT SETTING SWITCH G54 G59J PANEL SERVO gt Fig 10 1 1 Therefore the sequence number will be automatically inserted into the blocks during editing The incremental amount of the sequence number is set by number parameter No 0210 10 1 1 2 1 Press 2 Press Program input key to enter Edit mode PROGRAM key to enter program page See Fig 10 1 2 PROGRAM 000002 NO180 000003 N0060 X100 N0120 XO N0240 G41 X100 DI N0300 GOI Y100 N0360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 GOI YO F2500 NO180 XO N0180 Y50 DATA Ln 3 S0000 T0100 EDIT MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 2 239 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 2 3 Press address key o then key in numerical keys ooo oe by sequence an example by setting up a program named O00002 it displays O00002 behind the data column See Fig 10 1 3 PROGRAM 000002 NOL80 000003 N0060 X100 N0120 XO N0240 G41 X100 DI N0300 GOI Y100 N0360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 GOI YO F2500 NO180 XO N0180 Y50 DATA 00002 Loe 3 S0000 T0100 EDIT MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig
109. NDEX gt page the manual operation steps for various interfaces are introduced you may find the corresponding introduction in INDEX pages if you are unfamiliar with some operations 2 ALARM interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 6 In lt INDEX gt page press ALARM soft key to enter this interface INDEX INFO ALARMS 000001 N00000 NO 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 MEANING Power not off after parameter input File open fail Data input overflow Program number exists 66 22 Digit or character input without address Modify program Address with no data but another address or EOB Code modify program Character input wrongly for address or 2 or 73 22 more input Modify program by eee de 99 9958 wrongly input for address 2 or more input Modify program Lasisi S0000 T0000 EDIT G CODEJ PARA MACRO p Fig 3 9 6 In this interface alarms meaning and operations are shown 3 Gcode interface is shown in Fig 3 9 7 In lt INDEX gt page press G CODE soft key to enter this interface as INDEX INFO G CODE 000001 N00000 G73 G83 G89 G96 G01 G03 G04 G10 G15 G17 G18 G19 G21 G28 G29 G30 G40 G42 G43 G44 G50 G53 G54 G55 G57 G58 G59 G60 G62 G63 G65 G68 G69 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G97 G98 G99 S0000 T0000 Rapid positioning G00 EDIT COPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO p
110. OFFSET key in offset page 0 Not switchover page by repressing OFFSET key in offset page SET 1 To switchover page by repressing SET key in set page 0 Not switchover page by repressing SET key in set page GRA 1 To switchover page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page 0 Not switchover page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page DGN 1 To switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSIS key in diagnosis page 0 Not switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSIS key in diagnosis page ALM 1 To switchover page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page 0 Not switchover page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page Standard setting 1111 1111 System parameter number 0 2 6 INDX PMC PMC 1 To switchover page by repressing PMC key in PMC page 0 Not switchover page by repressing PMC key in PMC page INDX 1 To switchover page by repressing INDEX key in index page 0 Not switchover page by repressing INDEX key in index page Standard setting 11 00 0000 System parameter number 0 217 PSK CPD NE9 OSR NE8 NE8 1 Editting of subprogram with the number 80000 89999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with the number 80000 89999 allowed OSR 1 O search available for program search 0 O search not available for program search NE9 1 Editting of Subprogram with the number 90000 99999 unallowed 266 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL
111. PEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 10 06 00 l MDI REL ABS ALL MONT Fig 3 1 5 The meaning of them is as following Programming speed Speed specified by F code Actual speed The actual cutting rate overriden Feedrate override Feed override selected by feedrate override keys Rapid override Rapid override selected by rapid override keys G codes The value of the G code in block being executed Tool offset HOOOO tool length compensation for current program DOO0O0 tool radius compensation for current program Parts count Plusing 1 when M30 is executed Run time Time counting start if Auto running starts time units are hour minute and Sx Spindle override for spindle speed S00000 Actual feedback speed of spindle encoder T0000 Tool number specified by T code in program Note The parts counting is reserved after the power down The clearing ways 1 Switchover to POSITION mode CHENGE 2 Press key the cursor locates to the PRT CNT item input data and press ENTER key to confirm if key is pressed the parts counting will be cleared 3 Shift Up and Down keys to RUN TIME 183 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL ENTER 4 Press key to clear the RUN TIME Note 1 To display the actual spindle speed the encoder must be applied to the spindle Note 2 The actual speed the programming
112. PROGRAM CURRENT MODAL 000002 N0120 CURRENT MODAL GO GOO 1000 G17 1000 G90 30 G94 0000 G54 0000 G21 0000 ABSOLUTE G11 X 0 0000 G98 Y 0 0000 G15 Z 0 0000 G50 G69 SPRM 02500 G64 SMAX 100000 s0000 T0100 MDI DATA C PkG MDI CUR NXTI DIR 233 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Fig 8 1 1 8 2 Run and stop of MDI instructions After the instructions are input by the steps in section 8 1 press key to run the MDI instructions During the running the instructions execution can be stopped by pressing key Note 1 MDI running must be performed in MDI mode Note 2 The program inputin CUR MOD interface is executed prior to that input in MDI mode 8 3 Words modification and clearing of MDI instructions BASF If an error occurs during word inputting key can be pressed to cancel the input GANEL word by word or press key to cancel the whole block input if the error is found after the input is finished reinput the correct words to replace the wrong ones or press key to clear all for reinputting 8 4 Modes changing When the control is switched to MDI DNC Auto Edit mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the system will stop the program execution after the current block is executed When the control is switched to Step mode by a dwell during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode it will execute the step interruption See secti
113. Program Composition 2 1 Program composition A program is composed by many blocks which are formed by words The blocks are separated by the end code LF for ISO CR for EIA In this manual the end code is represented by character 000002 N00180 000002 N60 X100 Fol EOB CODE N240 G41 X100 DI N300 GOL Y100 SEQUENCE N360 G02 X200 R50 N420 G01 YO F2500 RAM N480 XQ N540 M30 END NO ADD Ln 2 S0000 T0100 EDIT T PREY MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 2 1 Program structure The set instructions to control the CNC machine tool to machine the parts are called program After the program edited is entered into the CNC system the system controls the tool to move along straight line arc or make the spindle run or stop by these instructions And the instructions should be edited by the machine actual movement sequence The program structure is shown in Fig 2 1 2 1 1 Program name In this system the system memory may store many programs In order to differentiate these programs address O with five figures behind it is headed in the beginning of the program And it is shown in Fig 2 2 Oo OOOOO E Program numbernO SS99o heading U negligible in inputting Address 0 20 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Fig 2 2 Program name composition 2 1 2 Sequence number and block A program is consisted by many instructions and an instruction unit is called block
114. RARION MANUAL Main program Subprogram Instruction 1 Instruction 1 Instruction 2 f Instruction 2 Follow the direction of the r subprogram instruction n Instruction n 1 m Return to the main program Fig 2 4 Program execution sequence The structure of the subprogram is same as that of the main program If there are fixed sequence blocks occurring repeatedly in a program it can be taken as a subprogram which can be stored in the memory in advance with no need to be edited repeatedly So it can simplify the program The subprogram can be called in Auto mode usually by M98 in the main program And the subprogram called can also call other subprograms The subprogram called from the main program is called the 1 level subprogram 4 levels subprogram at most can be called in a program Fig 2 5 The last block in the subprogram must be the returning instruction M99 After M99 execution the control returns to next block following the block that calls the subprogram in the main program to go on execution If the main program end is M99 the program execution can be repeated Main program Subprogram Subprogram M98P2000 Onetevel nesting Twoevel nesting Fig 2 5 Two level subprogram nesting A single subprogram call instruction can be continuously and repeatedly used to call a subprogram up to 999 times 2 2 1 Subprogram edit Write out a subprogram by following format ee CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC
115. RARION MANUAL 4 Monitoring mode It enters MONITOR mode by pressing MONI soft key in this mode the absolute coordinate relative coordinate of the current position as well as the current running program modal message and blocks can be displayed together See Fig 3 1 4 MONITOR 000002 N0120 CRELATIVE CABSOLUTE GOO G17 G90 G94 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Go4 G21 G40 G49 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 G80 G98 G15 G50 Z Q 0000 Z 0 0000 F 1000 AF 0 S 1000 M 3 H 0000 D 000002 N0060 X100 N0180 Y100 50000 Note 1 The display in MONI mode can be set by BIT6 of the parameter NO 023 when BIT6 0 the machine coordinate but the modal instruction is displayed at the original position 2 In lt MACHINE ZERO gt lt STEP gt lt JOG gt lt MPG gt modes the intermediate coordinate system is a relative one while in lt AUTO gt lt MDI gt lt DNC gt modes it is a remaining distance 3 1 2 The display of the run time part count programming speed and override actual speed etc The programming speed the actual speed feedrate and rapid override G codes tool offset run time part number spindle override spindle speed tools etc can be displayed in lt POSITION gt absolute or relative mode see Fig 3 1 5 182 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL second ENTE ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 96 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT S
116. SK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 10 Edit Operation 10 1 Program edit The part program edit should be operated in Edit mode The Edit mode can be entered by pressing PROGRAH Press key to enter program page then press PROG soft key to enter the program edit and modification interface as is shown in Fig 10 1 1 PROGRAM 000002 N0060 X100 N0120 XO N0180 GO1 X50 Y50 F2000 N0240 G41 X100 DI N0300 G01 Y100 N0360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 G01 YO F2500 N0180 XO N0180 Y50 DATA Lis 2 EDIT BG EDT BG END J CHECK LSAVE RETURN P Fig 10 1 1 Press PJ soft key to enter next page lt 4 REPLASE L CUT copy PASTE RETURN P Press P soft key to enter next page lt RSTR RETURN Press lt 44 soft key to return to last page lt 4 REPLASE CUT COPY PASTE RETURN P The replacement cut copy paste reset operations etc can be done by pressing the corresponding soft keys The switch of the program must be opened before program edit See the section 3 5 2 Parameter and program switch in this manual for its operation Note The maximum lines a program file contains are 200 000 238 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 10 1 1 Program creation 10 1 1 1 Auto creation of the sequence number Set the auto sequence number for 1 by the steps in section 3 5 1 See Fig 10 1 1 1 SETTING 000002 N0120
117. Safety Operations sssccceccsssoccccceeessocccceceessocccceeeessosocceeesesssocceeee 176 2 1 System power ON un eeeeeccccccccccesssssssceececcesesssssceeccecessesssseeeccceeeesssseeeecceeesesssseeeseeceeseetsseeeeeees 176 Zee OVSE DOW Cl OP essnee aaa EEE E E R 176 Por eyo MOINS e E A 177 PA A E E EEO a i saaticsssconinnentxaccnncsusgsseshaneanssnnsiubesdsssungswisuvbusnansmncenetiabostinsunpsuiduxbeananeneewentiadiens 177 Dec EE y e cae seh caae a rcneg suse sap adee natecs santa amenosessapsiceasencdi ous ansaaee douetowatastatesonos 177 De MoS MOU cceccadien secede tseceaeatiea E E E A suneledesecatadanusstacaweasus 178 2 4 Cycle start and feed NON cccecescccccccceessssssceecccceesssssseeeecceeessessseescecesesesssseeeeeees 178 Ra OVC AV CL FOE O A EE A EEE E EE 178 2 5 1 Hardware overtravel protection ccccccccccccssssssssseesseseecececeeeeeeeeeaaasesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaas 178 2 5 2 Software overtravel protection sseseesssssssssssssscetterrrssssssssssssseeeetreressssssssssssseeeteerresessses 179 2a Release OF the overtravel alari ene E AE 179 3 Interface Display as well as Data Modification and Setting cccsssssssssssccsssscssscceeeees 180 el POS NOn IS DIAY aaa a EE EE E EEE EAE E E EA E EEA 180 3 1 1 Four types of position display cccccccccccccccccccceeeesssseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 180 3 1 2 The display of the run time part count programming speed an
118. UAL G65 H02 P 102 Q 503 R 102 G65 H32 P 103 Q 502 R 102 G65 H02 P 103 Q 500 R 103 G65 H31 P 104 Q 502 R 102 G65 H02 P 104 Q 501 R 104 G90 G00 X 103 Y 104 M10 G65 H02 P 100 Q 100 R1 G65 H84 P200 Q 100 R 101 M99 X i X i R COS 6i Y i Y i R SIN i The i th hole positioning Hole drilling M code output i i 1 When i lt IE it goes to N200 to drill IE holes Program examples for calling custom macro body is as following 00010 G65 H01 P 500 Q100000 G65 H01 P 501 Q 200000 G65 H01 P 502 Q100000 G65 H01 P 503 Q20000 G65 H01 P 504 Q12 G92 X0 YO Z0 M98 P9010 XO YO M30 X0 100MM Yo 200MM R 100MM A 20 N 12 in CCW direction Calling custom macro 152 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 Miscellaneous Function M code The M codes available in this system are listed as following M codes used by Program ends and returns to program M30 program begining workpieces added by 1 Program ends and returns to program begining workpieces added by 1 M98 Calling subprogram Subprogram ends and returns M99 execution repeated z 00 0 M03 Spindle CCW M04 Spindle CW P I M codes rogram dwe ak Program optional dwell controlled by PLC Spindle stop M06 Tool change M08 Cooling on Mog Cooling off M10 _ 6 M17 M19 A axis release A axis clamp Tool release Tool clamping Sp
119. UAL as is shown in Fig 3 8 3 ALARM MESSAGE 000002 NOOOO 07 03 01 13 28 0000 Please power off S0000 T0100 EDIT ALARM USER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 3 4 OPERATE interface In lt ALARM gt page press OPERATE soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 4 The OPERATE page displays the modification message on the system parameters and ladders e g the modification content and time OPERATE HISTORY 000002 NOOOO 07 03 01 13 32 MODIFY BIT PARA 0021 7 07 03 02 15 39 MODIFY BIT PARA 0023 7 S0000 T0100 EDIT ALARM USER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 4 OPERATE and HISTORY alarm interface can display 34 pages of alarm history message such as the alarm time alarm number alarm message and page numbers and they can be viewed by page keys The recording of the HISTORY and OPERATE can be deleted by pressing lt DELETE gt key system debugger level or above 207 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 9 PLC display PLG Press the key to display the PLC page there are 4 modes INFO PLCGRA PLCPAR LPLCGDN in this page which can be viewed as following by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 9 1 to Fig 3 9 4 PLCINFO VERSION No 0 MT NAME GSK 218M VINDICATOR GSK Coder MODIFY DATE 2007 1 6 LADDER MAX ROW 1000 EXECUTE MAX ROW 3000 X MT gt PMC X0 X63 C COUNTER CO C127 Y PMC gt MT YO Y63 T VAR TIMER TO T127 F NC
120. X Y Z Ror any additional axes boring is not performed Annotation The value of Z and R must be specified in the back boring cycle programming Alarm occurs if point Z is below point R Example M3 S500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G87 X300 Y 250 Z 120 R 150 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 orient at the initial level then shift by 5mm and dwell at point Z for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G86 G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 17 Boring cycle G88 Format G88 XYZR PF Function It is used to bore a hole Explanation 101 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level
121. Z axis which is the distance below R level and it is over O if the initial cut depth exceeds the groove bottom it should machine by this bottom Q Cut depth of each feed V Distance to the end surface at rapid tool traverse which is over 0 D Tool diameter number ranging within O 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is got by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location in XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 To cut W depth downward by cutting feedrate 4 From center outward to mill a circle surface with a radius helically by a L increment each time 5 Z axis rapidly returns to R level 6 X Y axes rapidly position to the circle center 7 Z axis rapid downward to a location with a distance V to the end surface 8 To cuta Q V depth downward in Z axis 9 Repeat the actions from 4 8 till the total depth of circle surface is finished 10 Return to initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path _75 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Kapid feed ee UIE feed Example To rough mill a groove within a circle by canned cycle G22 instruction which is as follows Er amp CGSB I HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL L en Ln initial level z 50 ATN l sista L 10 oirt i tm p i I 50 i G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioni
122. a vedi aabesddesciaees 85 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 oo ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeesseeesees 87 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring G82 o cc ceeseessssseeececceceeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaeseeeeees 89 4 4 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 cccccccccceccccececceeceeeeeaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeseees 90 4 4 11 Right handed tapping cycle G84 ccsssssssssssecccecececeeeeeeaaeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeesees 92 4 4 12 Left handed tapping cycle G74 cccsssssssseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeees 94 4 4 13 Fine boring cycle G7 G xcseursscicarrcssancancarsiantaadananinwasventientiiaanwansienincdsousenaseenradianeniuariannddaast eure 95 Ae NAN Bonns eyele Gn eeen E E E 97 AAS Pom Cy e O a E 98 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 nnnnennenessssssssssssssseterrrresssssssssssssesetereresssssssssssee 100 4 4 17 Boring cycle Gyo oa cea ssconastonsiisnnmansdonesanaiosantiaehiaacundcsaaaitsdanatuerssmen he aadeadinaanthasiennindeiauvence tones 101 AANG Boring cycle GS esses ccssnsdsousuiveiadcuw danmesdseodwuastesdeuaiaaadenaidea eai anderen arisen 103 4 4 19 Right handed rigid tapping G84 ccc ccecscsseeceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeaeaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeasaeeeeeees 104 4 4 20 Left handed rigid tapping G74 ccsssssssseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeees 106 4 4 21 Canned cycle canc
123. ackground edit interface the program editing operation is the same as that in Edit mode Refer to Chapter 10 Program Edit Operation in this manual Then press B LOG soft key to save the edited program and exit this interface 232 CGS IF HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 8 MDI Operation Except the input modification offset operations in MDI mode the MDI running function is also available in this system By this function the instructions can be input directly for execution The input modification offset operations etc are introduced in Chapter 3 Page display as well as data modification and setting This chapter will depict the MDI running function in MDI mode 8 1 MDI instructions input The input in MDI mode is classified for two types 1 By MDI type multiple blocks can be input continuously 2 By CUR MOD type only one block can be input The input in MDI is identical with the program input in Edit mode see Chapter 10 Program Edit operation in this manual for details The CUR MOD input is introduced as following Example To input a block GOO X50 Y100 in CUR MOD page the steps are key to enter the MDI mode PROGRAM 2 Press key to enter the Program page press CUR MOD soft key to enter the CUR MOD page see Fig 8 1 1 ENTER 3 Key in the block GOOX50Y100 by sequence and press key to confirm then the block will be displayed on the page see Fig 8 1 1
124. acts The retraction trail that affects machined surface finish and the tool damage should be avoided in the operation Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom 95 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R level Q Offset of the hole bottom Po Dwell time F Cutting feedrate K Number of fine boring repeats G76 G98 GTG G99 Shift amount q When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops at a fixed rotation position and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip and retracted This ensures that the machined surface is not damaged and enables precise and efficient boring The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance and the retraction axis and direction are specified by bit parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 And Q is a positive value if Q is specified with a negative value the sign is ignored The hole bottom offset of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which should be specified carefully as it is also used for the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G76 use a miscellaneous function M code to rota
125. altered by G10 which is shown as following G10L2 Pp XYZ By instruction External workpiece zero offset P 0 P 1to6 Workpiece zero offset of workpiece coordinate system from 1 to 6 XYZ For absolute instruction G90 it is workpiece zero offset of each axis For incremental instruction G91 it is workpiece zero offset set plusing each axis the result is the new workpiece zero offset By G10 instruction each coordinate system can be altered respectively Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate system 1 G54 system 2 G55 system 3 G56 system 4 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 ee Workpiece Workpiece coordinate coordinate system 6 G59 system offset Machine Zero y 5 i Machine reference point Y A Mach ne coordinate origin Fig 4 2 8 1 As shown in Fig 4 2 8 1 after power on the machine returns to machine zero by manual zero 47 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL return The machine coordinate system is set up by machine zero with the machine reference point generating and workpiece coordinate system to be defined The corresponding values of offset number parameter P10 14 in workpiece coordinate system are the integral offset of the 6 workpiece coordinate system The 6 workpiece coordinate system origins can be specified by coordinate offset input in MDI mode or set by number parameter P
126. alue for the end point of specified axis Due to the difference of the tool length value assumed usually the 1 tool and the actual tool length in machining saved in the offset memory the tool of different lengths can be used for machining only by changing the tool length offset value but not changing the program 111 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G43 G44 specify the different offset direction and H code specifies the offset number For the tool length compensation the effectiveness of the offset value by H code respecified or in next block is set by bit parameter No 39 6 1 Offset direction G43 Positive offset frequently used G44 Negative offset Either for absolute instruction or incremental instruction when G43 is specified the offset value stored in offset memory specified with the H code is added to the coordinate of the specified axis moving end point in the program When G44 is specified the offset value specified by H code is subtracted from the coordinate of the end position and the resulting value obtained is taken as the final coordinate of the end position G43 G44 are modal G code which are effective till another G code belonging to the same group is used 2 Specification of offset value The length offset number is specified by H code and the new moving instruction value of Z axis is obtained by plusing or subtracting the value of the offset number from the moving instruc
127. ame block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G81 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 10 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drilling hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs ah CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring G82 Format G82X_Y ZR P_F_K Function It is used for normal drilling to feed to the hole bottom and dwell then retract the tool rapidly from hole bottom Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifie
128. ameter G90 or G91 mode specified for the default positioning parameter at power on can be set by bit parameter NO 31 4 parameter is 1 2 AS GaSe M HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 2 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 X_ orP_ Function The dwell is executed by G04 and the execution of next block is delayed by the time specified In addition a dwell can be specified to make an exact stop check in cutting mode G64 G04 X 0 9999 999 X for second P 0 99999 9999 P for millisecond Explanation G04 is non modal instruction which is only effective in current line Alarm occurs if parameter X P both appear Only X or P can follow G04 instruction alarm occurs if other code follows it Alarm occurs if X P value is set for negative O A O N gt Exact stop is executed if neither X nor P is specified 4 2 6 Unidirectional positioning G60 Format G60X Y Z F Overrun Start position N Start position Function For accurate positioning to eliminate machine backlash G60 can be used for accurate positioning in a direction 2 an Temporary stop End position Explanation G60 is non modal code which is only effective in a specified block For parameter X Y Z they represent the end point coordinate in absolute programming and moving distance of tool in incremental programming When using unidirectional positioning in tool offset the path of unidirectional positioning is the tool compens
129. and angle can use the absolute or incremental 52 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL instructions G90 G91 If G16 is used the 1 axis of the positioning parameter of the tool moving command represents the polar radius in polar coordinate system the 2 axis of that represents the polar angle in polar coordinate system If G15 is specified the polar coordinate system can be cancelled and the control returns to the Cartesian coordinate system The definition of the polar coordinate system origin 1 In G90 absolute mode if G16 is specified the workpiece coordinate system origin is regarded as the polar coordinate system origin Specified position Specified position Radiu Radius r Actual position Angle Actual position yZ When the angle is specified When the angle is specified with an absolute instruction with an incremental instruction 2 In G91 incremental mode if G16 is specified the current point is regarded as the polar coordinate system origin Example Bolt hole circle the workpiece coordinate system zero point set as the polar coordinate system origin selecting X Y plane Y The zero point of the work coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system a The XY plane is selected To specify angle and radius by absolute value G17 G90 G16 To specify polar coordinate system and take the workpiece coordinate system zero
130. anned cycle M5 Spindle stops Example Usage of canned cycle using tool length compensation Reference position a 1 6 drilling of a 10 hole 7 10 drilling of a 920 hole 11 13 boring of a 995 hole Retract position 250 7 Initial level i w SNS ES M G GU U U l 109 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL T 11 T 15 200 190 mi Value 200 is set in offset No 11 190 is set in offset No 15 150 is set in offset No 31 The program is as following N001 G92 X0 YO ZO NO 02 G90 GOO Z250 T11 M6 NO03 G43 Z0 H11 N004 S300 M3 NO05 G99 G81 X400 Y 350 Z 153 R 97 F120 NOO6 Y 550 NO07 G98 Y 750 NO008 G99 X1200 NOO9 Y 550 N010 G98 Y 350 N011 GOO X0 YO M5 N012 G49 Z250 T15 M6 N013 G43 Z0 H15 N014 S200 M3 N015 G99 G82 X550 Y 450 Z 130 R 97 P30 F70 N016 G98 Y 650 N017 G99 X1050 N018 G98 Y 450 N019 G00 X0 YO M5 NO020 G49 Z250 T31 M6 N021 G43 Z0 H31 N022 S100 M3 N023 G85 G99 X800 Y 350 Z 153 R47 F50 Coordinate setting at reference point Tool change Tool length compensation at initial level Spindle start Positioning then 1 drilling Positioning then 2 drilling and point R level return Positioning then 3 drilling and initial level return Positioning then 4 drilling and point R level return Positioning then 5 drilling and point R level return Positioning then 6 drilling and initial l
131. ation and cutting along Z axis It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool radius compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining In the case above if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid feed and cutting feed follow the precedure below For black M3 f Z axis moving Instruction J tis divided as following H1 391 GOOS007S00H04 Na Z 2450 E NS GO1Z SOF4 He OOF 2 Ni G91G00s500Y500H01 NE Offset mode N3 GO1Z 300F1 M6 YIOOF M6 is entered into butter when Wa flove instruction in axis NS is being executed The relation between therm is the offset as shown In figure o N1 Offset start 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 Format G39 or J_ G39 K_ J K Function By specifying G39 in offset mode during tool radius compensation corner offset circular interpolation can be specified The radius of the corner offset equals the offset value And the effectiveness of the corner arc in radius compensation is set by bit parameter No 41 6 Explanation 1 When the instruction above is specified corner circular interpolation in which the radius equals offset value can be performed 2 G41 or G42 preceding this instruction determines whether the arc is CW or CCW G39 is a non modal G code 3 When G39 without I J K is programmed the arc at the corner is formed so that the vector at the
132. ation path The overrun marked in above figure can be set by system parameter P335 P336 P337 P338 P339 and the dwell time can be set by parameter P334 The positioning direction can be defined by the set positive or negative overrun refer to system parameter for details Example 1 G90 GOO X 10 Y10 44 CGSB m HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G60 X20 Y25 1 If the system parameter P334 1 P335 8 P336 5 as for statement 1 the tool path is AB dwell for 1s gt BC Y 20 25 Bis 20 Ai 10 10 Dwell for 185 G System parameter Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in X axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in Y axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in Z axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in 4th axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in 5th axis unit mm Dwell time of unidirectional positioning Cunit mm 4 2 7 System parameter online modification G10 Function It is used to set or modify the values of pitch error compensation radius length offset external zero offset workpiece zero offset additional workpiece zero offset number parameter bit parameter and so on in program Format G10 L50NP R Set or modify bit parameter G10 L51N R Set or modify number parameter G11 Parameter input mode cancel Parameter definition N Para
133. can be set by bit parameter No 40 7 The offset value of the offset number can be saved into the offset memory in advance by LCD MDI panel For the tool radius compensation the effectiveness of the offset value by D code respecified or in next block is set by bit parameter No 39 4 The range of the offset value is as follows minut Offset value D 999 999 999 999mm Note The default offset value of DOO is 0 that can t be set or modified by user 3 Plane selection and vector Compensation calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17 G18 G19 This plane is called the compensation plane For example if XY plane is selected the compensation and vector calculation are carried out by X Y in program The coordinates of the axis not in compensation plane are not affected by compensation In simultaneous 3 axes control only the tool path projected on the compensation plane is compensated SIET CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The change of the compensation plane can only be performed after the compensation is cancelled 4 G40 G41 and G42 The cancellation and execution of the tool radius compensation vector are specified by G40 G41 G42 They are used to define a mode to determine the value and the direction of the offset vector by combination with GOO G01 G02 G03 Tool radius compensation cancel Tool radius compensation right Tool radius compensation cancel G40
134. ccur tor NS G01 G91 500 0 Y 700 0 interference check under N6 G41 G02 J 300 0 some situation lf the tool is NF G42 G01 X500 0 Y700 0 te needed to move by the oe whole circle it must be specified by seqments 42 6 Temporary offset cancel In offset mode the offset is temporarily cancelled by the following instructions specified by parameter No 40 2 Refer to offset cancel and offset start for the details of this operation a G28 automatic reference point return If G28 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored after reference point return G26 Intermediate position eraen fF etter ree rigiri b gt G29 automatic return from reference point If G29 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored at the next block If it is specified immediately after G28 129 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 28 Intermediate position GOD ESS If it is not specified immediately after G28 G29 Intermediate position 42 GU0 7 Tool radius compensation G code in offset mode In offset mode if the tool radius compensation G code G41 G42 is specified a vector perpendicular to the previous block will be created which is irrelative to the machining inner or outer side If this G code is specified in circular instructions the arc will not be cor
135. ce point offset use no 1 For G28 when reference point not setup alarm 0 For G28 when reference point not setup use tongue 1 For non linear positioning axes interlock all axes stop 0 For non linear positioning axes interlock axes interlock 258 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Standard setting 0001 0000 System parameter number 00 5 PR see ISC 1 Min moving unit of 0 0001mm 0 0001deg 0 Min moving unit of 0 001mm 0 001deg IPR 1 Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit effective 0 Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 06 MAOB ZPLS EDN EDP ZRN ZRN 1 System alarms if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running 0 System doesn t alarm if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running EDP 1 Rapid traverse and cutting effective of each axis external positive deceleration signal 0 Rapid feed effective of each axis external positive deceleration signal EDN 1 Rapid traverse and cutting effective of each axis external negative deceleration signal 0 Rapid feed effective of each axis external negative deceleration signal ZPLS 1 Zero type selection one revolution signal 0 Zero type selection non one revolution signal MAOB 1 Zero type selection for non one revolution signal B 0 Zero typ
136. ce point return for all axes Setting range O 500 mm min 0100 X axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 286 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0101 Y axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range O 9999 mm min 0102 Z axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0103 4 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0104 5 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0105 L type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0106 L type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0107 L type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0108 L type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid 4TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0109 L type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0110 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0111 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0112 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 287 CGSB P HIS
137. ce points in machine coordinate system In a system without an absolute position detector the Pies 3 A reference point return functions can be used only after the auto reference point return G28 or manual reference point return is performed Format G30P2X Y Z the 2 reference point return P2 can be omitted G30 P3X_Y Z the 3 reference point return G30 P4X Y Z the A reference point return Function It is used for the operation of returning to the specified point via the intermediate point specified by G30 from the reference point Explanation 1 X Y_Z Instruction for specifying the intermediate point absolute incremental 2 The specification and restriction for G30 instruction is the same as G28 instruction See number parameter P50 64 for the ge Sia 4 reference point setting 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 Format G29X Y Z_ Function It is used for the operation of returning to a specified point via the intermediate point specified by G28 from the reference point Explanation 1 The action of the G29 block can be analyzed as following refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point point R point B specified by G28 from the reference point at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to a specified point from the intermediate point point B point C at a traverse speed 2 G29 is a non modal instruction which is only effective in current block Usually return from reference point should be
138. chamfering corner rounding 2 0 0 ccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeseees 64 43 FRETETCMCE point G COUE ps secesiccnsaciaiestecivaaesb seria causes eanceadhaiesetad aausiekes vieclobed ARETOETARA Ninis 66 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 ssessssssssssssseeeterrresssssssssssssssssecttrrrrerssssssssssssseetterreeessssssssssees 66 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 seessssesssssssssseteerrrrsssssssssssssssssseetrerrssssssssssssses 68 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 eesssesssssssseeeeerresessssssssssssseeereerrrrrrsssssssssssses 68 Ad Reference point rew check G2 assesseer a e a aA 69 AA Ganmed Cyce G COC orere ES aE E EASE EEA EEEE ETENE AEE 69 4 4 1 Rough milling of circular groove G22 G23 ooo ccccccccccccccceeesesessseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaeeesees 75 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle within a circle G24 G25 i cccccccccccccccecceeeaeeeesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaeessees 71 443 Outer circle fine milling cycle G20 G3 2 esssnere neern aS iEn 78 4 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 cc cccccccccccccecceceeeeesesseseeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeaaaeeeeesees 80 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 ee eeeecsssssseeeccceeeceeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeees 82 4 4 6 Rectangle outside fine milling cycle G35 G36 oc cccsnsseeeseeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaaaaaeeensees 83 4 4 7 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 cisciasdaivcesessinesrnsaieiacesoacbaanier edeieassidenecidictas
139. chip removal function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key The indicator lighting up is for ON gone out for OFF 219 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 Step Operation 5 1 Step feed Press key to enter the Step mode in this mode the machine moves by the system defined step each time 5 1 1 Selection of moving amount Press a key to select a moving increment in 0 001 0 01 D l keys the displays a step 0 100 See Fig 5 1 1 ACT POS RELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 STEP W 0 100 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 OO Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MDI REL ABS ALL MONT 10 06 00 Fig 5 1 1 The machine axis moves 0 1mm when pressing this key once 5 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction X axis may be moved in positive or negative direction by pressing axis and direction key Press the key once the corresponding axis will be moved for a step distance defined by system And the feedrate can be overridden by pressing override keys The 220 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL operation for X or Z axis is identical with that of X axis The manual synchronous 3 axes moving is not supported in this system but the synchronous 3 axes zero returning is 5 1 3 Step feed explanation 1 The step
140. classified for main program type and macro type If the M code for program and the move instruction are in a same block the move instruction will be executed before M code 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 M02 When M30 M02 in the program is executed in auto mode the auto mode is cancelled The blocks following them are not executed and the spindle and cooling stops The control returns to the beginning of the program while the numbers of the workpiece machined added by 1 Under any situations M30 M02 is regarded as the end of the program execution M30 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 to return to program beginning M02 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 2 to return to program beginning Note 1 M codes such as M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 can t be specified together with other M codes they must be specified in single blocks or alarm is issued by system 2 These M codes include the M codes sent to machine by CNC and the CNC inner operation codes such as the M code to disable the block pre reading function In addition the M code sent to machine by CNC without inner operation can be specified in a same block 5 2 2 Program dwell M00 In Auto running automatic operation pauses after a block containing MOO is executed And the modal information before will be saved The automatic operation can be continued by pressing cycle start key which is equivalent to pressing down feed hold key 5 2 3 Program optional stop M01 Automatic
141. cle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 14 Boring cycle G85 Format G85 X_Y_Z RF K_ Function It is used to bore a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate K_ Number of repeats G85 G98 G85 G99 i B Point R Point R Point R level Foint Z OF lt CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL After positioning along X and Y axis traverse is performed to point R level and boring is performed from point R level to point Z level As the tool reaches the hole bottom cutting feed is performed then return to point R level Before specifying G85 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G85 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching B
142. ctions are equivalent to the following instructions G30 GOO X0 0 100 0 G02 X200 0 Y0 0 10 0 J 100 0 F500 in this case the end point does not beet the radius a linear section Is Included YY 200 0 scaled shape 100 0 0 0 100 0 200 0 X Fig 4 2 14 3 Scaling of circular interpolation 2 7 Scaling is ineffective for the tool radius compensation tool length compensation and tool offset which is shown in Fig 4 2 14 4 Programmed figure y Scaled figure SmE Cutter compensation values are not scaled Fig 4 2 14 4 Scaling of tool radius interpolation Example for mirror image program Main program G00 G90 M98 P9000 we wae CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G51 X50 0 Y50 0 11 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J1 M98 P9000 G50 Subprogram O9000 GOO G90 X60 0 Y60 0 G01 X100 0 F100 G01 Y100 G01 X60 0 Y60 0 M99 0 40 50 60 100 Restriction 1 The moving scaling of Z axis is ineffective in following canned cycles 1 The cut in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle G83 G73 2 Fine boring cycle G76 3 Offset value of X axis and Y axis in back boring cycle G87 2 In JOG mode the traverse distance can t be increased or decreased by scaling Note 1 The position is displayed by scaling coordinates 2 The result for an axis performing mirror image in a specified plane is a
143. cycle starts and go downward to the bottom to perform the rectangular groove fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 7 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 Format G73X YZRQFK Function This cycle is especially defined for high speed peck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole by rapid retraction The operation illustration is shown as Fig 4 4 1 1 Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Depth of cut for each cutting feed F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats _ 85 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G73 G98 G73 G99 Initial level Fig 4 4 1 1 Z R The hole bottom parameter Z and R must be correctly specified while performing the 1 drilling operation omitting unallowable or the alarm is issued Q If parameter Q is specified the intermittent feed is performed as shown in above figure And the retraction is performed by the retraction value d Fig 4 4 1 1 set in number parameter P270 The rapid tool retraction
144. d by PLC Three gears 1 to 3 gear are available in this system the maximum speed of each gear is set by parameter P246 P247 P248 respectively which can be output by modifying the ladder During the spindle CW or CCW rotation in JOG or Auto mode the increase or decrease for the corresponding spindle gear can be adjusted by pressing positive negative override keys In MDI mode the system will automatically select the corresponding gear as the specified speed is entered Spindle motor speed Fy Wax speed inw Fr ee e eae eae ee Sa Ts aN TT aC i ME Aa OE Ta Aa I l i i ae i Mar clamh sheeda a Ws ne Oe ment van see ee ers ey Sv ee i l I of spindle motar l l i l l l i l i l 7 l Min clamp speed ee E l l l of spindle motor Jos Spindle rotation instructions Gear 1 Gear Gear 3 Co Instruction Wax speed Max speed Max speed Note When the spindle auto gear is effective the spindle gear is detected by gear in position signal and S instruction is executed 4 3 Other manual operations 4 3 1 Cooling control Compound key The cooling function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key The indicator lighting up is for ON gone out for OFF 218 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 3 2 Lubricating control oe Compound key The lubricating function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key 4 3 3 Chip removal Compound key The
145. d by absolute value or location X Y incremental value and the control is identical to the GOO positioning F As Fig 4 4 2 A shows the distance from point R level to the hole bottom is specified by incremental value or the hole gt bottom coordinate is specified by absolute value And the feedrate is the speed specified by F in operation 3 while in operation 5 it is a traverse speed or a speed specified by F code due to the different machining type In Fig 4 4 2 B the distance from the initial level to point R level is specified by incremental value or point R level coodinate is specified by absolute value The speeds in operation 2 and 6 are both traverse It is used to specify the cut in value or the parallel moving Data for hole value in G76 or G87 machining It is used to specify the dwell time at the hole bottom The canned cycle instruction can be followed by a parameter P_ which specifies the dwell time after the tool reaches the Z plane The time unit is ms The min value of the parameter can be set by number parameter P281 and the max value by yO number parameter P282 It is used to specify the cutting feedrate The repetition is specified in parameter K_ which is effective only in the specified block It can be omitted and the default is K one time The max drilling times are 99999 If a negative value is specified it executes by absolute values If zero is specified the mode is changed wit
146. d override actual speed etc NEEE E T A EEEE E E ncaa tb N E E E E E E EAE TE EE E 182 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and mediating ce eeeeeeessssseeccceceeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeessseseeseeeeeeeeees 184 32 Progranrdisplay A ee 185 3 3 The display modification and setting of the parameters 000 0000 cece ccccceessssseeeeeeeeeeens 188 aL Pammer CS PAY shea saces sien casstante ANE 188 3 3 2 Modification and setting of the parameter values cccccccccceeceececceeeceeaeaeessssseeseeeeeeees 190 3 4 Offset display modification and SEttING ec cccceesesscceccccesesstssseececeeeeetssseeeeeeeeeeees 191 Dead OE Vel T e E E E E E 191 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 4 2 Modification and setting of the Offset Value ce eeesessssseeecccccceeceeeeeeaaeeeeesseseeeeeeseeeeess 192 3 9 Seting CIS DI AY fiscsesaiedasrousiscenssiausasuicabscsnisaideaviieitcandaueduatnietasedashdwstansnissedasedaunnesidaanaebdaabnasaduanans 193 EE S PaE EE ata ats A atan eda dca waa E T E 193 3 5 2 Parameter and program on off page eeessssssssssseseeeeerrrsssresssssssssssssseterereessssssssssssseeeereee 195 3 5 3 Coordinate setting interface cccecccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeesssseeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaaeesseeseeeeeeeseeeess 196 3 5 4 Display and setting of the machine soft panel ccccccsceecececceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeessseseeeeeeeeeeeess 196 Dee SE a erecta ace serge re eighteens usi
147. d per revolution G95 Format G95 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount in a revolution Unit mm rev or inch rev Explanation 1 After specifying G95 feed per revolution mode the feed amount of the tool per revolution is directly specified by a number after F 2 G95 is a modal code Once specified it is effective till G94 is specified 3 An override from 0 to 150 can be applied to feed per revolution with the override key on the operator panel Feed amount per spindle revolution mm rev or inch rev 163 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Fig 7 2 2 1 Feed per revolution Note Feedrate fluctuation may occur if the spindle speed is low The slower the spindle rotates the more frequently the feedrate fluctuation occurs 7 3 Tangential speed control Usually the cutting feed of the tool is made by controlling the speed along the tangent of the contour path to reach a value specified Y Staring point End point Center End point tart aurea pint X Linear interpolation Circular interpolation F The speed along the tangent F F F F Fy The speed along X axis Fy The speed along Y axis Fl The speed along Z axis 7 4 Feedrate override keys The feedrate in JOG mode and AUTO mode can be overriden by the override keys on the operator panel The override range from 0 150 16 gears with 10 per gear In AUTO mode if the feedrate override is adjust
148. d the angle unit is degree If no rotation angle is specified in this function the angle will be set by number parameter P329 3 In G91 mode the rotation angle last rotation angle current angle specified by R in G68 instruction 4 When the system is in rotation mode plane selection is not allowed or errors will be shown Attention should paid in programming 5 In coordinate system rotation mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can t be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled if needed 6 After coordinate system rotation the tool radius compensation tool length compensation tool offset and other compensation operation will be performed 59 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 7 If coordinate system rotation is performed in scaling mode G51 the rotation center coordinate values will be scaled If the rotation angle is not scaled when the moving instruction is given the scaling will be executed first then the coordinate system rotation In scaling mode G51 the coordinate system rotation instruction G68 can t be given in tool radius compensation G41 G42 it should always be specified before tool radius compensation Example 1 Rotation G92 X 50 Y 50 G69 G17 G68 X 50Y 50 R60 G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X100 G02 Y100 R100 G3 X 100 l 50 J 50 G01 Y 100 G69 Tool path after rota
149. d to axis control bit par 0003 0008 num 0005 0002 parameters related to coordinate system bit par 0009 0010 num 0010 0003 parameters related to travel detection bit par 0011 hum 0066 0004 parameters related to feedrate bit par 0012 0014 num 0086 0005 parameters related to acc dec control bit par 0015 0017 num 0105 No ales S0000 T0000 EDIT OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO P Fig 3 9 9 The functions parameter settings are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in it if you are unfamiliar with some parameter settings s22 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 MACRO interface In lt INDEX gt page press MACRO soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 10 INDEX INFO MACROINSTRUCTION 000001 N00000 G65 H M P I Q J R K M HI HJ HK IS J H02 H03 H04 H05 H11 H12 P 1 4 01 99 operation instruction operation result var seq alarm operand 1 variable invariable operand 2 variable invariable I J K I J K I J HK I J K I J or K I H J and K S0000 T0000 DIT OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA Fig 3 9 10 The MACRO format and operation instructions are introduced in this page the local variables common variables and the system setting range are also shown in this page you may find the corresponding in
150. de function is on its indicator lights up and M S T functions are ineffective Machine Lock If it is on its Auto mode MDI key indicator lights up mode Machine zero and the axis output MPG mode Step is ineffective mode JOG mode DNC mode Working Light For machine Any mode key working light on off Lubricating For machine Any mode key lubrication on off Cooling key For coolant on off Chip Removal Chip removal Any mode key switch Feedrate For adjustment of Auto mode MDI Override keys the feedrate mode Edit mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode JOG mode DNC mode Rapid traverse For rapid traverse Any mode key on off Rapid Step For rapid override Auto mode MDI and MPG manual single mode Machine zero override keys step MPG MPG mode Step override selection mode JOG mode DNC mode eee CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Manual For Machine zero MPG X Y 7 E dih feeding keys positive negative mode Step mode moving of X Y Z JOG mode ex ey ez em A axis in JOG Step mode and the positive direction of the axis is by MPG Overtravel Alarm occuring if JOG mode release key machine reaches the hard limit pressing this key with indicator lighting up to move reversely till the indicator gone out Program Cursor moving to Auto mode MDI Restart key the beginning of mode DNC mode the starting block to restart t
151. dification and setting of the parameters 3 3 1 Parameter display ARAMETE Press key to enter parameter page There are BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO1 and MACRO2 modes in this page And they can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys the steps are as following 1 Bit parameter page Press BITPAR soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 1 188 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL BIT PARAMETER 000002 N0120 NO 0000 0001 0O I MIRX 0002 I O OQ ASII SB1 ASIO SBO 0003 l l i 0 0 DIR5 DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX INM 0004 l I QO O0 XIK AZR SFD DIZ 0005 0 0 0 DATA s0000 T0100 MDI BITPARY NUMPAR MACRO1 MACR0O2 Fig 3 3 1 See details about this parameter in Appendix 1 2 Number parameter page Press NUMPAR soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 2 NUM PARAMETER 000002 N0120 NO MEANING DATA 0000 1 0 channel select input output device 9 00O communication channel 0 baud rate unit 100 384 0002 communication channel 1 baud rate 0003 screen protection wait time minute 0004 system interpolation period millisecond 000b 5TH of the sec ref pnt in machine crd system 0006 program axis name of each axis OOO7 set axis name in basic coordinate system 0008 servo axis number of each axis 0009 STANDBY 0010 external workpiece origin point X offset 0 0000 0OIl external workpiece origin point Y offset 0 0000 DATA s0000 T0100 EDIT
152. e and positioning 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 Instruction M21 It is used to search tool in retraction M22 it is used to search a new tool for clamping 5 1 8 Magazine rotation instruction M23 M24 Instruction M23 Itis used to rotate the tool magazine to the spindle M24 Itis used to rotate the tool magazine back 5 1 9 Rigid tapping M29 Instruction M29 Itis used for rigid tapping 5 1 10 Lubricating on and off M32 M33 Instruction M32 M33 It is used to control the lubricating pump If the miscellaneous functions are locked in auto mode this instruction is not executed 5 1 11 Helical chip remover on and off M35 M36 Instruction M35 M36 Itis used to control the helical chip remover 5 1 12 Mirror image instructions M40 M41 M42 M43 Instructions M40 is used to specify X axis mirror image M41 is used to specify Y axis mirror image M42 is used to specify Z axis mirror image M43 is used to cancel mirror image 5 1 13 Spindle blowing on and off M44 M45 Instruction M44 M45 Itis used to control the spindle blowing 5 1 14 Auto tool change start and end M50 M51 Instruction M50 M51 Itis used to control the start and end of auto tool change 155 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 5 1 15 Tool judging after tool change M53 Instruction M53 Itis used to judge the tool after the tool change 5 2 M codes used by program M codes used by program are
153. e bottom line of the LCD Press the key to display the alarm page there are 4 modes ALARM USER HISTORY 205 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL OPERATE in this page which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 8 1 to Fig 3 8 4 They can also be set by parameter No 24 6 for switching to alarm interface if an alarm is issued 1 Alarm interface In lt ALARM gt page press ALARM soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 1 ALARM MESSAGE 000002 N0000 NOTHING S0000 T0100 EDIT O ALARM KUSER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 1 In alarm page it displays the message of current P S alarm number See details for the alarm in Appendix 2 2 USER interface In lt ALARM gt page press USER soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 2 EXT ALARM MESSAGE 000002 N0000 NOTHING S0000 T0100 EDIT ALARM USER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 2 See GSK218M CNC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CONNECTION AND PLC MANAUL for the details of the user alarm Note The external alarm number can be set and edited by user according to the site conditions The alarm after editing is input into the system via a transfer software However the name of the file edited must be PLCALM TXT 3 HISTORY interface In lt ALARM gt page press HISTORY soft key to enter this interface 206 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MAN
154. e by tool length measurement Setting range 0 9999 9999 0352 e value by tool length measurement Setting range 0 9999 9999 304 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0356 Setting range 0 9999 0357 Total workpieces to be machined Setting range 0 9999 0358 Accumulative time of power on hour Setting range 0 9999 Workpieces machined 0360 Accumulative time of cutting hour Setting range 0 9999 0361 Tool life management signal ignored Setting range 0 9999 0362 Tool life left using times Setting range 0 9999 0363 Tool life left using time Setting range 0 9999 0365 Number of MPG used Setting range 0 3 0366 Handwheel sliding amount allowable Setting range O 10 0371 Positioning error allowable for reverse X axis 0 0150 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0372 Positioning error allowable for reverse Y axis 0 0150 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0373 Positioning error allowable for reverse Z axis 0 0150 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0374 Positioning error allowable for reverse 4TH axis 0 0150 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0375 0 0150 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm Positioning error allowable for reverse 5TH axis 305 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL As the set backlash compensation value P0190 P0194 of an axis is over the reverse positioning allowable error P0371 P0375 of this axis the speed at t
155. e coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats Spindle Oly Fon kes F Ten toe o Spindle C Ci f Point R Foint R Paint R level amp Point Z N Spindle stop Spindle stop After positioning along X and Y axis the tool rapidly traverses to point R level And boring is performed from point R level to point Z level When the tool reaches the hole bottom it is retracted in traverse Before specifying G86 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G86 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G86 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level 99 CGSB
156. e line it moves to the end of the last line e Press 5 key to scroll the screen upward and the cursor moves to the first line and first column of the last page if it is scrolled to the program beginning the cursor locates at the second line and the first column of the page f Press 5 key to scroll the screen downward and the cursor moves to the first line and first column of the next page if it is scrolled to the program end the cursor locates at the last line and the first column of the program g Press key the cursor moves to the beginning of the line it locates cm om h Press keys the cursor moves to the beginning of the program i Press key the cursor moves to the end of the line it locates ae j Press keys the cursor moves to the end of the program 10 1 1 5 Insertion deletion and modification of word PRUGHAN Select lt EDIT gt mode then press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the position to be edited 1 Word insertion INSERT After keying in the data press key the data will be inserted to the left of the Cursor 2 Word deletion 242 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL DELETE Locate the cursor to the word to be deleted press key the word will be deleted If the key is pressed continuously the words to the right of the cursor will be deleted 3 Word modification Move the cursor to the place to be modified and key in the new cont
157. e selection for non one revolution signal A Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 007 ZMI5 ZMl4 ZMiz ZMly ZMIx ZMIx 1 Direction setting of X axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of X axis reference point return positive ZMly 1 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return positive ZMiz 1 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return positive ZMI4 1 Direction setting of 4th axis reference point return negative 259 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Direction setting of 4th axis reference point return positive ZMI5 1 Direction setting of 5th axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of 5th axis reference point return positive Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number 00 8 ROAx RABx RRLx RRLx RABx ROAx Rotation axis cycle effective Rotation axis cycle ineffective Rotation direction setting of absolute instruction instruction value sign Rotation direction setting of absolute instruction near to the target Moving amount per revolution rounding for relative coordinates Moving amount per revolution not rounding for relative coordinates Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 0 9 ZCL
158. ed for zero the feeding is stopped by the system with 0 override displayed The execution is continued if the override is readjusted Note No message is displayed if the feed override is zero 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration The stable start and stop can be done by auto acceleration deceleration at the beginning and the end of the moving controlled by the system motor And the auto acceleration deceleration can also 164 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL be done when the moving speed is changed so the speed can be changed steadily Therefore the acceleration deceleration needn t to be considered for programming Rapid traverse Fore acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 S type hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Cutting feed Fore acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 S type hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type JOG feed Hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Set the universal time constant for each axis by parameters Rapid traverse rate Fa Rapid traverse rate Tp Acceleration deceleration time constant for rap id traverse rate Time speed Time speed after interpolation See speed after acceleration and deceleration 165 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Feedrate JOG Fe Feedrate T Acceleration
159. ed from the offset cancel to tool radius compensation And the circular interpolation GO2 G03 is impermitted C Switching of tool radius compensation The offset direction is usually changed from the left to the right or vice versus via offset cancel mode But the positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 can be changed directly not via offset cancel mode and the tool path is as follows Mew vector se CLJ y Tool center path ee ans ef C fs T Tool center path sear hisanuaciat usually not linear 777 Programmed Gld A path vector Programmed path Old vector ji G1G6G41D_X_ Y G42D_ X_Y__ G1G42D_ X_Y_ G41D_X Y D The change of offset value The change of offset value is usually performed at the tool change in offset cancel mode but for the positioning G00 or linear interpolation G01 it can also be performed in offset mode It is shown as follows 118 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL xx vector Tool center path P 0 Y Tool a Programmed path Mew vector x Y Programmed Old vector path Old vector The change of offset value E The positive and negative offset value and the tool center path If the offset value is set for negative it is equivalent to change the G41 and G42 in program that the outer cutting for workpiece turns into inner cutting and inner cutting for outer cutting In the following programming figure the offset value is assumed for posit
160. eeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeseeeenes 216 42 9 119 2 618 0 eee een nen nr nn OCR INNS EEEE EAE AEAEE rE nota Riet 217 AM SUC NY a E E E E 217 Raa P AN n a E E E E T E E EE 217 W PNG O E E EEE E E 218 Ae PMCS UO E T I A E E A 218 4 3 Other manual operations eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeererseessssssssrerrrerrerrsssssssssrerrrreteeeeessssssssseerrrreeeeeesess 218 AL Coola conio essne a aa n 218 4 3 2 Lubricating COMtrOl cc cccccccecccccccecccceeeeeeeseessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaageeesees 219 BO CPTO NOV dainn aE 219 5 Step 021 cr 1 0 9 Dern rr nT re re TE Co rr 220 TN E E oE E e E E sed E E cie anya sedan A T E EN EE EE ETT 220 5 1 1 Selection of moving amount cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseesaesasseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 220 5 1 2 Selection of MOVING axis and direction esssssseeeoeeeeeeesssssssssssssssssseeetrrrerssssssssssssseeeereeeo 220 Jd SfepicedexplanatiOisssenanicrieri onsale nase acne awed na eaor rii 221 ZS BASU p A EAA T TEA AON AAA POA NA AA AIA A OAA T T 221 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step Mode 2 0 0 cece cccccccessssscceeccceeeesssseeeeceeeeesssssseeeceeeesesstseeeeeeeeeeees 221 o MPO ODPEra O ea A herr nay errant itr 222 E IN GTS braces cde E EEE EE E EET A EEI EE A EREE 222 6 1 1 Moving amount SCIECHON ssissiconnccrssoraversaasseavsaansadestecsiabtverasenpapedabiacsnindenveaianaaieiaracnanes 222 6 1 2 Selection Of MOVING axis and direc
161. efore the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G85 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 15 Boring cycle G86 Format G86 X Y Z RF K Function Itis used to perform a boring cycle Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole 98 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolut
162. el G80 ccccccccccsssssssesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeees 108 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 45 Toolcompensation G COGS vsecivncicirivantnontiaasuindilossvevivaadawadslawtsiansaatireibivedtetniedadsdluetsuatitinieldannen 111 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 sssseeseesssssssssssssssseerrrressssssssssssssssssecerrereesesssss 111 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 ooo ccccccccccccccessssseessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeseeeeees 114 4 5 3 Explanation of tool radius compensation ccccccccccccececceeeseeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseeenes 121 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 ssessssssssssesssssesessssrrsssrresssrresserresseressseresssreesss 137 4 5 5 Tool offset value and number input by program G10 esesssessssssesssressrrsserrrsrressrrsseressn 139 AO Feed G COUE aron E E EEE snare E EE EAE EEEE 139 AGL FPoedmode GONGO IGO cose c ae carried en a wasateas anced a aaneateaetniaanaeutarnanite 139 4 6 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 occeccccccccsssccessccessecessecessecesseeceseeceseecesseeesas 140 Ae MaG 10 0 ea E rer eres are Crrreeetrreterecrn reer rrenere te tere erennreter tere erent 142 eM CEND e E E E E u ceed EE emeconeouaes 142 Ac Custom macro INSU UC HOM sens E a OER 143 W O E E ao E E E A E 143 4 7 4 Examples for custom Macr0 ccccccccccccssssssssssseseeececeeeeeeeeeaaaeeessssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaaaeaaaa
163. em enters into emergency status and the maching movement is stopped immediately All the outputs such as the spindle running coolant are also cut off If the emergency button is released varying by machine builders usually the button bumps up by rotating it left handedly the emergency is cancelled Note 1 Ensure the cause of the fault is eliminated before the emergency is cancelled Note 2 Perform the reference point return operation to ensure the position coordinate after the emergency is cancelled The common emergency is a normal close signal When the trigger point is broken off the system enters into emergency status and the machine stops immediately The wiring of the emergency signal circuit is as following 177 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 74 ay Emergency stop switch Ear 2 3 3 Feed hold key can be pressed during the machine running to make the running to dwell But in rigid tapping cycle running the machine dwells till current instruction is executed 2 4 Cycle start and feed hold The Cycle Start and Feed Hold keys are used for the program start and dwell operations in Auto mode MDI mode and DNC modes The external start and dwell are set by bit parameter No 59 7 7 and they can also be set by modifying the address K5 1 of the PLC These two methods are equivalent 2 5 Overtravel protection Overtravel protection must be employed to prevent the damage to the mac
164. em manufacturer the 2 level machine builder the 3 level system debugger the 4 level terminal user the 5 level operator by descending sequence The system defaults the lowest level at power on See Fig 3 5 8 The 1 and the 2 level The modifications of mode parameters number parameters tool offset data and PLC ladders transfer etc are allowed in these levels The 3 level The modifications of CNC mode parameters number parameters tool offset data etc are allowed in this level The 4 level The modifications of macro variables tool offset data are allowed in this level But the modifications of CNC mode parameters number parameters pitch compensation data are not allowed in this level The 5 level No password The operation of the machine operator panel is allowed in this level but the modifications of tool offset parameters CNC mode parameters number parameters pitch compensation data are not allowed 199 CGS HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL SETTING PASSWORD 000002 N0000 SYSTEM PSW NEW AGAIN MACHINE PSW NEW uu AGAIN DEBUG PSW NEW AGAIN USER PSW NEW AGAIN S0000 T0100 EDIT lt 4 DATA PSW Fig 3 5 8 1 After entering this page in MDI mode move the cursor to the item to be altered ENTER 2 Key in the password under the corresponding level then press key If the password is correct the message Password is correct
165. end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of the next block It is shown as follows 137 CGS P HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL X axis In offset mode N1 10 0 N2 G39 Y axi N3 X 10 0 Block N1 Offset vector Block N2 Block N3 we Programmed path Tool center path a 10 0 10 0 Fig 4 5 4 1 G39 without I J K 4 When G39 is specified with I J K the arc at the corner is formed so that the vector at the end of the arc is perpendicular to the vector defined by the J K values It is shown as follows x axis In offset mode N1 10 0 N2 639 1 0 J2 0 N3 X 10 0 20 0 Y axis Block N2 Block N1 Offset vector Block NS l Programmed Banana path l 1 0 J 2 0 Tool center path 10 0 20 0 Fig 4 5 4 2 G39 containing I J K 138 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 5 5 Tool offset value and number input by program G10 Format G10 L10P_R_ Geometric offset value of H code G10 L12P_R_ Geometric offset value of D code G10 L11P_R_ Wear offset value of H code G10 L13P_R_ Wear offset value of D code P Tool offset number R Tool offset value in absolute mode G90 For the tool offset value in incremental mode G91 it is added by the value of the offset number specified the result is the tool offset value Explanation The range of tool offset value Geometric offset metric
166. enen ooo oo 0099 rortppostonngerornosee F ooa itererenoeim ORO 307 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL subprogram nesting error 0083 illegal axis instruction in G37 Communication error 308 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL re ewe alarm number not found 0799 unsupported nsn os maanen oo ons Wegalaxisinstuston OOOO PMC axis change disabled om estasen O 309 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0161 G instructions of reference point plane selection or direction oe Teeraa eT 0163 G codes of reference point coordinate system disabled in rotation a 0164 G codes of reference point coordinate system disabled in scaling T 6166 No aris specedin reference pontretum mer memedate pontcoornatetoolaye e168 Panax canto spected ogohern G04 0770 toolradus compersatonnotcancoled 0172 Protiniegr cress han Oin a blockcaingsbprowam ora Subprowramcaledseyords68 o 0776 canned oyat can ony be srecen erpen 0776 spindle speed not specied before igidtapong oer woane O ore waso o we maree o ores toolseectedbeyondrange o rere was o v oaea O w moassen o e201 feodratentioundinetappng eat2 postontSiovertow o e2t8 program wionginngiappng a Wega operon tgdmode Olsgnaloh o e206 cantchangeleneadtarring jean Tapping dataworg om2 wae o 0224 eeen o a merman o 0232
167. ent then press ALTER key to replace the old content by the new one 10 1 1 6 Deletion of a single block PROGRAM Select lt EDIT gt mode then press key to display the program Locate the cursor to DELETE the beginning of the block to be deleted Press keys to delete the block where the cursor locates Note N could be keyed in to delete the block whether the block is headed with sequence number cursor heading the line 10 1 1 7 Deletion of multiple blocks The blocks from the currently displayed word to the specified sequence number block can be deleted Ki X100 0 MO3 02 N2233 S02 N2300 M30 Current cursor location To be deleted Fig 10 1 1 7 PRUGHAN Select lt EDIT gt mode press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the beginning of the target to be deleted position of word N100 as figure above then key in the last DELETE word of the multiple blocks to be deleted e g S02 N2233 as figure above press key to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified Note 1 The blocks that can be deleted are two hundred thousand lines at most 2 If several words to be deleted are same in program it will delete the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location ee CGiSR I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 10 1 2 Deletion of a single program The steps for deleting a program in memory is as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode
168. equirement Coolant ONMOFF The programs or machine on off actions controlled by system NC instructions are called miscellaneous functions which are instructed by M code Example If MO3 is instructed the spindle rotates clockwise by the speed specified Clockwise direction means the direction viewed from the spindle Z direction CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 5 Tool selection for various machining Tool function It is necessary to select a proper tool when drilling tapping boring milling etc is performed When a number is assigned for each tool and the number is specified in the program the corresponding tool is selected Tool number ATC magazine Example When No 01 is assigned to a drilling tool When the tool is stored at location 01 in the ATC magazine the tool can be selected by specifying T01 This is called the tool function 1 6 Tool figure and tool motion by program 1 6 1 Tool length compensation Usually several tools are used for machining one workpiece If instructions such as GOZO are executed in a same coordinate system because tools have different tool lengths the distances from tool end to workpiece are different So it is very troublesome to change the program frequently Therefore the length of each tool used should be measured in advance By setting the difference between the length of the standard tool and the length of each tool in the CNC
169. er pitch data ladder and programs can be backup saved and reverted read and the data input or output to PC is also available in this system The part programs saved in CNC are unaffected during the data backup and reversion See Fig 3 5 6 SETTING DATA 000002 N0120 es gt Q A T ye es lt es yo z PARAMETER LADDER PMC PARA PMC CUTTER COMP PITCH COMP MACRO VAR MACRO PRG SUB PRG PART PRGR IUCUCUOn OOOOOCOL NOHOOUO00 IOOOOOO00 S0000 T0100 EDIT lt 4 DATA PSW Fig 3 5 7 Operation 198 CGS I ISK F GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 Inthe 2 page of lt SETTING gt mode set the corresponding password in PSD soft key page The ladders parameters can be only operated under the machine builder s authority level System parameters tool offset pitch compensation and system macro variables can be operated under the system debugger level or above 2 Return to DATA page after the cursor moves to the target position the backup or ENTER reversion of the data can be finished by pressing key Note Data input and output system needs to connect with PC to transfer data by the relevant software 3 5 Password authority setting and modification To prevent the part programs and CNC parameter from malicious modification the password authority setting is available in this GSK218M system It is classified for 5 levels which are the 1 level syst
170. er JOG Switching to JOG din mode mode in Auto mode JOG system immediately slowing down to stop 172 CGSB m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL MPG mode To enter MPG Switching to MPG key mode mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop DNC mode To enter DNC Switching to DNC key mode mode in Auto mode system slowing down to stop if current block is executed Spindle control Spindle CCW MPG mode Step keys Spindle stop mode JOG mode Spindle CW Spindle Spindle speed Any mode override keys adjusting spindle speed analog control effective Spindle JOG Spindle JOG on off JOG mode key Spindle Spindle orientation JOG mode Orientation key on off Tool magazine Tool magazine JOG mode operation keys operation on off Manual tool For manual tool JOG mode clamp release clamping release key Manual tool For manual tool JOG mode change key change aa Block Skip key For block Auto mode MDI preceding mode DNC mode with sign skipping if it is set for on the indicator lights up Single Block For switching of Auto mode MDI key program mode DNC mode single continue if it is on the indicator lights up 173 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Dry Run key If it is effective the Auto mode MDI indicator lights up mode DNC mode M S T Lock If the Auto mode MDI key miscellaneous mode DNC mo
171. er type menu or press the DNC transfer button Dyess in tool column to transfer data ENTE 6 Press the key on panel to receive data then press key to start running 7 Then operate by normal machining pattern 8 During the transmission the transfer information involving the file names bytes lines transferred and the transmission time and speed bytes s will be displayed which is shown as following Don t do other operations by this software except concluding the transmission 2 Transfer type for sending files 1 Open and set the serial port with a fixed baudrate 115200 the data bits stop bit and parity check are identical with that in DNC transmission and it can t be changed ag ee 2 Open the Send file item of transfer type menu or press the button in tool column the following dialogue block will pop up 251 OGRE TAUB EE 6SK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Merete MPS re D ERSist CL TIE E are w AGA 3 Select Add file button the dialogue block Partition Selection will appear The program files can only be sent to user partition while the system configuration and backup files can only be sent to system partition or they won t be identified by system To send system configuration and backup files requires the machine builder or dealer level authority you can enter the relevant password in CNC password setting pa
172. erererereersssssssssseerrreeeeeeesssssssssses 230 LO RUNAINO Wiin M S T TOCK a A a iR 230 7 9 Feedrate and rapid override in auto rUn eeeeesssssseesessssssssssssssssssssssessesesseeeeeeeereeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 230 7 10 Spindle override in auto run ou cccccccceeesesssessessssceceessesccccceeessssseesesseeseesessseseeeeeess 231 LA COON COUN OM ste ccen essences cate date tontateauisvie EA 231 7 12 Background edit IN auto FUN ccccccccccccceeeeeseesssssnssseeeeeeeecceceeeeeeeseetesssssaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 UDC AO aac occa sans ea eae sce eects ainai tate ets sts tte ete ees 233 ofl MDASTUCIONS IA U perenne ey re Te to eo EET EERE 233 8 2 Run and stop of MDI Instructions 0 0 cceccecessscccccscccccceceesssseesessssssseeeeesseeeeeeeees 234 8 3 Words modification and clearing of MDI instructions i cceeeccccccccceessssseeeeeeeeeeens 234 8 4 Modes CHANGING wisndssecosadeseccrnsssnsotadasenssadunushendesermaassacsesaduenbeadmaastaedaunbsadoaeseaedoteemnmarsetediansade 234 9 Machine Zero OperatioOn ssssooocoseceeeceeseessssooooococcceceeeeeesesooooocooceceeeeeeeeeessoooooooocceeeeseeeeessssoosooosee 235 91T GONCEDUOM Ol machine ZENO srrirripiriressatrier isinir aniren SEEE N NERE SARE EEEE AEREE EE 235 9 2 Sleeps for Machine Zel Oeser Ear EO Eare Enae 236 9 3 Machine zero steps by program esesssssssssssssssseerrrrrrssssssssssrerrreeeeresssssssssssserereeeeeeesssssssssses 236 10 FA OPETAN E AE A tasceee td acs est
173. es of 09 group at reset or emergency stop C10 1 To clear G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop C11 1 To clear G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop C12 1 To clear G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop C13 1 To clear G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop C14 1 To clear G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop C15 1 To clear G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 7 WDIR SCRW SCRW 1 To perform pitch compensation 0 Not perform pitch compensation WDIR 1 Pitch compensation selection unidirectional 0 Pitch compensation selection bidirectional Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 8 PG2 PG1 SAR 270 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL SAR 1 To detect the spindle speed in position signal 0 Not detect the spindle speed in position signal PG2 PG1 Gear ratio of spindle and position encoder OO for 1 1 01 for 2 1 10 f
174. et vector points to or is apart from the circle center from the start point or the end point Tool center path LX Y A o i Tool center path i E Programmed path N A start point Old vector ak e Qld vector start point Tool radius compensation right G42 By contrast to G41 G42 specifies the tool to deviate at the right side of the workpiece along the tool advancing direction l e the vector direction got in G42 is reverse to the vector direction got in G41 Besides the direction the deviation of G42 is identical with that of G41 1 In G00 G01 mode G42X Y D G42X_Y_ x T Programmed path aA New vector start point Old vector Tool center path 2 In G02 G03 mode 117 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL p 4 Es T i New vector rogramme eneco A Y path p Frogrammed path li Tool center path Stan aini Qld vector i ater Tool center path Old vector start point Fig 4 5 2 A 6 Precautions on offset A Specification of offset number G41 G42 and G40 are modal instructions The offset number is specified by D code they can be specified at any place from the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode Alarm is issued if G41 G42 instructions are not followed by moving instructions B From the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode The moving instruction must be positioning GOO or linear interpolation G0O1 when the mode is switch
175. eter P94 and in forecast mode it is set by parameter P96 If the feedrate is more than that use the feedrate set by that parameter In non forecast mode the minimum cutting feedrate is set by number parameter P95 and in forecast mode it is set by parameter P97 If the feedrate is less than that use the feedrate set by that parameter The cutting feedrate in auto mode at power on is set by number parameter P87 The cutting feedrate can be specified by the following two types 1 Feed per minute G94 it is used to specify the feed amount per minute after F code 2 Feed per revolution G95 it is used to specify the feed amount per revolution after 162 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL F code 7 2 1 Feed per minute G94 Format G94 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount in a minute Unit mm min or inch min Explanation 1 After specifying G94 in feed per minute mode the feed amount of the tool per minute is directly specified by a number after F 2 G94 is a modal code Once specified it is effective till G95 is specified The default at power on is feed per minute mode 3 An override from 0 to 150 can be applied to feed per minute with the override key on the operator panel Feed amount per minute mm min or inch muin Workpiece Table Fig 7 2 1 1 Feed per minute Restriction Feed per minute mode can t be applied for some instructions such as threading 7 2 2 Fee
176. evel return Reference point return spindle stop Tool length compensation cancel tool change Initial level Tool length compensation Spindle start Positioning then 7 drilling and point R level return Positioning then 8 drilling and initial level return Positioning then 9 drilling and point R level return Positioning then 10 drilling and initial level return Reference point return spindle stop Tool length compensation cancel tool change Initial level Tool length compensation Spindle start Positioning then 11 drilling and point R level return 110 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL N024 G91 Y 200 Positioning then 12 13 drilling and point R level Y 200 return N025 GOO G90 X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop N026 G49 ZO Tool length compensation cancel N027 M30 Program stop 4 5 Tool compensation G code 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 Function G43 specifies the positive compensation for tool length G44 specifies the negative compensation for tool length G49 is used to cancel tool length compensation Format There are 2 modes A B for tool length offset which are set by bit parameter No 39 0 in this system Mode A G43 G44 JZ H Mode B G17 G43 Z H G17 G44 Z H G18 G43 Y_H G18 G44 Y_H G19 G43 X_H G19 G44 X_H Tool length offset mode cancel G49 or HO Explanation The instruction above is used to shift an offset v
177. f fore acceleration 100 deceleration of cutting feed Setting range O 400 ms 0126 S type time constant of fore acceleration 100 deceleration of cutting feed Setting range O 400 ms 0127 L type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range O 400 ms 0128 E type time constant of back acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range O 400 ms 0129 FL speed of exponential acceleration deceleration 10 Setting range O 500 mm min 0130 Maximum blocks merged in pre interpolation Setting range O 10 0131 In position precision of cutting feed 0 03 Setting range O 0 5 mm 0132 Control precision of circular interpolation 0 03 Setting range O 0 5 mm 0133 Contour control precision of pre interpolation 0 01 Setting range O 0 5 mm 0134 Acceleration of the fore linear acceleration 250 deceleration interpolated in forecasting control Setting range O 2000 mm s 0135 Forecasting control S type fore acceleration 100 deceleration time constant 289 CGS I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Setting range O 400 ms 0136 Linear time constant of the back acceleration Setting range O 400 ms 0137 Exponential time constant of the back acceleration Setting range O 400 ms 0138 Exponential acceleration deceleration FL speed of 10 cutting feed in forecasting control Setting range O 400 ms 0139 Contour control precisio
178. f rapid traverse linear ALS 1 Auto corner feed effective 0 Auto corner feed ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 262 CGS I HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 17 CPCT CALT WLOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL CBOL 1 Cutting feed type back acceleration deceleration 0 Cutting feed type fore acceleration deceleration CBLS 1 Fore acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed S 0 Fore acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear CLLE 1 Back acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed exponential 0 Back acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear HLOE 1 JOG running type exponential 0 JOG running type linear WLOE 1 MPGrunning type exponential 0 MPG running type linear CALT 1 Cutting feed acceleration clamping 0 Cutting feed acceleration not clamping CPCT 1 To control the in position precision in cutting feed 0 Not control the in position precision in cutting feed Standard setting 1010 0000 System parameter number 018 RVCS RBK FFR RVIT RVIT 1 To execute next block after compensation as backlash is over value allowable 0 To execute next block during compensation as backlash is over value allowable FFR 1 Cutting and rapid traverse both effective in feedforward control 0 utting feed effective in feedforward control RBK 1 To perform backlash compensatio
179. fset value For incremental instruction G91 the new offset value can be gotten by adding the value specified to the current offset value By G10 instruction each workpiece coordinate system can be changed respectively 4 2 10 Machine coordinate system selection G53 Format G53X_Y_Z_ Function To rapidly position the tool to the corresponding coordinate location in the machine coordinate system Explanation 1 While G53 is used in program the instruction coordinate behind it should be the coordinate in the machine coordinate system and the machine will position to the location specified 2 G53 is a non modal instruction which is effective in block containing it and it doesn t effect the coordinate system defined before Restriction Machine coordinate system selection G53 When the position in the machine coordinate system is specified the tool rapidly traverse to this position The G53 used for selecting machine coordinate system is a non modal G code which is only effective for the block specifying the machine coordinate system Absolute G90 should be specified for G53 if G53 is specified in incremental mode G91 G91 is neglected G53 is still in G90 mode without changing G91 mode The tool can be specified to move to a special position e g in G53 can be used in program to position the tool to the tool changing point After power on Machine coordinate system must be set before G53 is specified after power on Therefo
180. fset value Usually during tool change the offset value must be changed in offset cancel mode If it is changed in offset mode the new offset value is obtained at the block end Offset by block E Offset by black ME ME c Positive and negative tool offset value and tool center path If the offset value is negative G41 and G42 is exchanged in program If the tool center is moving around the outer side of the workpiece it will pass around the inner side and vice versa The figure below shows the example Generally the offset value is programmed to be positive When a tool path is programmed as in figure a if the offset value is made for negative the tool center moves asin b and vice versa So the same program permits cutting for male or female shape and the gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset value 80 Tool center path berate bh Tool center path Cd Overcutting by tool radius compensation 1 Machining an inner side of the corner at a radius smaller than the tool radius When the radius of a corner is smaller than the tool radius because the inner offsetting of the tool will result in overcuttings an alarm will be issued and this is because overcutting is generated when the single block execution is stopped 135 CGSB I HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tool center path ke An alarm is generated and
181. ft key the file will be copied and the control enters the new program edit page 3 Returnto DIR page the name of the new program copied can be viewed 10 1 5 Copy and paste of blocks The steps for program copy and paste are as following a Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied b Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied CHENGE c Press key the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be copied d Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press P key to complete the paste The copy of the program can also be done in the program edit page 1 Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied 2 Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied 3 Press COPY soft key the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be copied 4 Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press PASTE soft key to complete the paste Note If several words to be copied are same in program it will copy the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location 10 1 6 Cut and paste of block Steps of block cut are as following a Enter the program edit page as Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block to be cut c Key in the last character of the block to be cut d Press the CUT soft key the block will be cut to clip board e Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted and press PASTE soft key the block will be pasted
182. fter B mode of tool length offset is executed along two or more axes all the axes offset can be cancelled by G49 while only the axis offset perpendicular to a specified plane can be cancelled by HO 5 G53 G28 or G30 in tool length offset mode While G53 G28 or G30 is specified in the tool length offset mode the offset vector of the tool length offset axis is cancelled after it moves to a specified position G53 cancelled at the specified position G28 G30 cancelled at the intermediate point but the modal code is not switched to G49 and the axes except the tool length offset axis are not cancelled If G53 and G49 are in the same block all the axis length offsets are cancelled after the axis moves to the specified position if G28 or G30 is in the same block with G49 all the axes cancel the length offset after they move to the intermediate point In tool length offset the offset vector cancelled by G53 G28 or G30 will be restored in the next block in the buffer 6 Example for tool length compensation A Tool length compensation in boring hole 1 2 3 B H01 offset value 4 113 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Actual position ae 2 offset 3 value Programmed 35 A 12 e 4mm position l ig ARS a id 2 N1 G91 GOO X120 Y80 1 N2 G43 2 32 HO1 we QQ N3 G01 Z 21 F200 oe a 3 N4 G04 P2000 ou 4 NGOO ZT i ai eerste 5 N6 X30 Y 50 cee cediicweresceesei
183. g executed and the blocks to be executed See Fig 3 2 5 PROGRAM NEXT MODAL 000002 N0120 CCURRENT NEXT T amp T TD TU rann A ANK AK X Y L X X R I J K P Q F L M H S0000 T0100 MDI PRG MDI ICUR MOD ICUR NXTIIDIR Fig 3 2 5 5 Program DIR display Press DIR soft key to enter directory interface it displays Fig 3 2 6 a The version of the system hardware and software b Number of the programs saved The programs saved including subprogram Remaining number of the programs that can be saved c Capacity used the capacity occupied by the programs saved expressed by characters 187 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Remaining the capacity available for program storage d Program directory list number of the program saved displayed by sequence Press CANGE key the program display changes by the name sequence and time sequence PROGRAM CDIR 000002 N0120 SYS VERSION 1 1 HARD 0 03 07 02 05 SOFT PRG USED 16 FREE 184 MEM USED 832 K FREE 7328 K PROGRAM DIR 000001 61 2006 11 12 14 25 000028 252 2006 11 12 14 25 000041 2588 2006 11 12 14 25 000151 14261 2006 11 12 20 000084 299 2006 11 12 000073 299 2006 11 12 000083 9 2006 11 12 000099 L2 2006 11 12 s0000 T0100 PRG MDI LCUR MOD L CUR NXT DIR Fig 3 2 6 Explanation The program numbers in memory can be displayed by the page keys 3 3 The display mo
184. g range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0062 Z coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0063 4TH coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0064 5TH coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0 0000 0065 Moving amount per revolution of rotary axis Setting range 0 999 9999 deg 283 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0066 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0067 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0068 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0069 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0070 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0071 Positive Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0072 Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0073 Positive 4T
185. g range 0 9999 0000 299 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0280 Clearance of small peck drilling cycle Setting range 0 9999 0000 0281 Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom Setting range O 100 ms 0282 Maximum dwell time at the hole bottom 9999 Setting range 0 9999 ms 0283 Override for retraction in rigid tapping 1 0000 Setting range 0 8000 1 2000 0284 Retraction or spacing amount in peck tapping cycle Setting range O 100 mm 0285 Synch error range setting for rigid tapping Setting range O 100 mm 0286 Tooth number of spindle side gear 1st gear Setting range 1 999 0287 Tooth number of spindle side gear 2nd gear Setting range 1 999 0288 Tooth number of spindle side gear 3rd gear Setting range 1 999 0290 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 1st gear Setting range 1 999 0291 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 2nd gear Setting range 1 999 0292 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 3rd gear Setting range 1 999 0294 Setting range 0 9999 r min Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 1st gear 500 300 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 2nd gear 1000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 3rd gear 2000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0298 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and
186. g range 0 9999 9999 0332 Scaling of Y axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0333 Scaling of Z axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0334 Dwell time of unidirectional positioning Setting range 0 9999 0335 Direction and overtravel amount of X axis unidirectional positioning Setting range O 10 0000 0336 Direction and overtravel amount of Y axis unidirectional positioning Setting range O0 10 0000 303 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0337 Direction and _ overtravel amount of Z axis unidirectional positioning Setting range O 10 0000 0338 Direction and overtravel amount of 4TH axis unidirectional positioning Setting range O 10 0000 0339 Direction and overtravel amount of 5TH axis unidirectional positioning Setting range O 10 0000 0340 Axis number of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 0341 Rotation speed of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 0342 Rotation insertion ineffective limit of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 0343 Moving limit to be executed by the last program normal angle Setting range 0 9999 9999 0344 Rotation limit of the controlled axis in normal direction inserted by a single block Setting range 0 9999 9999 0345 Minimum angle of indexing table Setting range 0 9999 9999 0350 Feedrate by tool length measurement Setting range O 1000 0351 r valu
187. ge 4 Open file dialogue block will appear after partition selection press and hold SHIFT or CTRL key to select multiple files the maximum 100 files can be selected 5 Click Open button to return to Sending file dialogue block after the file is selected 6 The name of the program file sent to user partition should be headed with letter O followed with a number within 5 digit including 5 Or the following dialogue block will pop up to prompt you to alter the program name A an RIT ES HAT 2 HC FS foz HC fee Agee HAF AER 7 After returning to Send file dialogue block click Sending button the file sending will be on and the following dialogue block will be popped up 252 CGS I HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL SEY Ht eS xi EERS fooogoz txt Bir USER Cee a 165 6306 E p 8 Transmission is over 2 Transfer type for receiving files 1 Open and set the serial port with a fixed baudrate 115200 the data bits stop bit and parity check are identical with that in DNC transmission and it can t be changed wi feu ey 2 Open the Receive file item of transfer type menu or press the button in tool column the following dialogue block will pop up wee TRE FiA E HR 3 Click Obtain directory button the files in CNC system will be listed RETH E xi wf 5 Alm Hep fe BR Erim PHeSteA 54 4 Se
188. ge are as follows Modification and setting of the offset value OFFSET 1 Press key to enter the Tool Offset page 2 Move the cursor to the offset number for inputting 192 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Step 1 press page keys to display the offset page to be modified move the cursor by pressing cursor keys to locate the offset number to be modified Step 2 press SEARCH key input offset number and press ali key for location 3 In lt MDI gt mode input the offset value After pressing ali key the offset amount is computed by system automatically and displayed on LCD Note 1 During the tool offset setting the new offset value is ineffective till its offset number T code is specified 2 The offset value can be modified during the program execution If the value is needed to be effective during the program execution the modification must be completed before the tool offset number is used 3 If length offset is needed to be added the relative coordinate value of Z axis the offset value should follow Z code then it will be automatically accumulated Example If Z10 is input the offset value is the one the actual relative coordinate added by 10 3 4 2 2 Modification and setting of pitch offset 1 Set the offset value required by modifying the parameters NO 221 NO 225 2 Enter offset value for every point by sequence 3 The pitch error offset is associated with the off
189. gram is identical with that in other macro program So the common variable I of operation result of a macro program can be used in other macro programs 144 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Common variables can be used freely in this system Variable number Variable Function type 100 199 Cleared at power off set for O at power on Common 500 999 variables Data saved in files and reserved even power off 3 System variables They are used for reading and writing a variety of CNC data which are Classified into 4 types as follows Interface input signal 1000 1032 1032 Sending 16 bit signal to custom macro from PMC the variables 1000 1032 are used for reading signal by bit and variable 1032 is used for reading a 16 bit signal at one time Interface input signal 1100 1115 1132 Sending 16 bit signal to PMC from custom macro the variables 1100 1115 are used for reading signal by bit and variable 1132 is used for reading a 16 bit signal at one time Tool length offset value 1500 1755 readable and writable Tool length wearoffset value 1800 2055 readable and writable Tool radius offset value 2100 2355 readable and writable Tool radius wear offset value 2400 2655 readable and writable Tool magazine data list 2 700 2955 read only unwritable Alarm 3000 User data list 3500 3755 read only unwritable Modal message 4000 4030 read only unwr
190. h compensation G92 X0 YO Z0 1 N1 G90 G17 GO G41 D7 X250 Y550 The offset value must be preset by the offset number 2 N2 G1 Y900 F150 3 N3 X450 4 N4 G3 X500 Y1150 R650 5 N5 G2 X900 R 250 6 N6 G3 X950 Y900 R650 7 N7 G1 X1150 8 N8 Y550 9 N9 X700 Y650 10 N10 X250 Y550 11 N11 GO G40 XO YO C1 700 1300 C2 1550 1550 C3 150 1150 P4 500 1150 PS o00 11504 P3 450 000 P6 250 900 Pr 1150 800 PoI7O0 650 ri Pi Y axis F o W ais Unit mm yy Start positior Programmed origin ii 120 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 5 3 Explanation of tool radius compensation Conception Inner side and outer side when an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move instructions for two blocks is over 180 it is called inner side when the angle is between 0 and 180 it is called outer side Programmed path Workpiece Workpiece Programmed path a 180 Meanings of symbols The following symbols are used in following figures S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc r indicates the to
191. h gives two programming format Circle center coordinate J K or radius R programming Only the three points above are all confirmed could the interpolation operation be done in coordinate system The circular interpolation can be done by the following instructions to make the tool to go Eo ae CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL along an arc it is shown as follows Arc in XY plane G02 R G17 XY F G03 IJ Arc in ZX plane G02 R G18 XZ F G03 IL K Arc in YZ plane G02 R G19 YZ F G03 J K iem Contem Instruction Description TO SPAI rotation Two axes of X Y Z point coordinate axis workpiece coordinate system Final position 4 Two axes of X Y Z Coordinate of end point axis relative to start point Distance from start point Two axes of JJ K Coordinate of circle center 4 to circle center axis relative to start point Arcradius radius Are radius radius CW and CCW mean the directions viewed from the positive Z or Y Z axis to the negative in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system regarding to XY or ZX YZ plane as shown in Fig 4 2 3 1 38 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Gif G18 G19 CVV and COVY Fig 4 2 3 1 The default plane mode at power on can be set by bit parameters NO 31 1 2 3 The arc end point can be specified by parameter words X Y Z It is an absolute value in G90 an incremental val
192. he machine also for rapid program check Optional Stop For stop of the Auto mode MDI key program with M01 mode DNC mode Feed Hold key Auto running stops Auto mode MDI by pressing this mode DNC mode key Cycle Start key Auto running Auto mode MDI begins by pressing mode DNC mode this key 175 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 2 System Power On Off and Safety Operations 2 1 System power on Before this GSK218M is powered on ensure that 1 The machine is normal 2 The voltage of the power supply conforms to the requirement of the machine 3 The wiring is correct and reliable The current position relative is displayed after system normalty check and initiation are finished ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000002 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MDI REL ABS ALL MONI 2 2 System power off Before power is off ensure that 1 The X Y Z axis of the CNC is at halt 2 Miscellaneous functions spindle pump etc are off 3 CNC power is cut off prior to cutting off machine power Check the following items before power off 1 The LED indicating the cycle start on the operator panel is off 2 All the movable parts of the CNC machine tool is at halt 176 CGS
193. he SINGLE BLOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is Single Block In this mode the system stops after a key to enter Auto mode press block is executed Press NUE SPA key to go on next block execution perform the operation repeatedly till the whole program is executed Note 1 In G28 mode the single block stop can be performed at an intermediate point Note 2 The Single Block function is ineffective if the subprogram calling M98 or the subprogram calling return M99 instruction is specified But for a block with M98 or M99 if M98 or M99 block contains an address other than N O P the Single Block function is effective 229 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 7 f Running with machine lock WIRE RINK key The MACHINE LOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is Machine lock In this mode the machine axes don t move But the In Auto mode press position coordinates displayed are the same as that during machine moving And M S T are effective too This function is used for program verification Note Due to that the machine position is not consistent with its coordinate position after MEE key is pressed and program running the machine zero operation is needed to be performed 7 8 Running with M S T lock In lt AUTO gt mode press key The M S T LOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is M S T LOCK
194. he end point of a single block lowers to minimum speed before this axis backlash compensation begins which will make the other axes move a small distance in the backlash compensation period and that will ensure the resultant path deviating the real path least 0376 Axes moving sequence to program beginning 12345 Setting range O0 99999 0380 Referential counter capacity of X axis Setting range 0 9999 0381 Referential counter capacity of Y axis Setting range 0 9999 0382 Referential counter capacity of Z axis Setting range 0 9999 0383 Referential counter capacity of 4TH axis Setting range 0 9999 0384 Referential counter capacity of 5TH axis Setting range 0 9999 306 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL APPENDIX 2 Alarm List Alarm Content Remark No 0000 pleasetumofpower o or freona o o w2 emnon o 000s program numberareadyinuse 004 addressnottound o 000s rocana o w06 Wegalnegaivesin S 0007 maeman O w9 moas o 0 Geodewong f omn erene o 4 oemet O s eomas S 0016 curent pich compensation beyondrange 0020 beyondradustoerance o rover mones O 02 arrsa o R J K of circular interpolation specified together ae 002r moesson oo 0028 memmen 0z maoae o 0030 Wegalcompensatonnumber o o oor morsen O 0092 Wegalcompensatonvaweim Gi s foresee SSS 0034 startup disabled or ofset cancoledinainstucton 0097 plane change dsabledin RO oos mor
195. he indicator for U disk doesn t blink 2 Press EXIT button or repower it will enter the CNC system 255 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL APPENDIX 1 GSK218M PARAMETER LIST Explanation The parameters are classified as following patterns according to the data type 4 data types and data value range 127 127 Sign is not used in some parameters Word o 32 6 32 6 7 Sign is not used in some parameters Double word 99999999 Double word axis 99999999 1 For bit and axis parameters the data are comprised by 8 bits with each bit having different meaning 2 Axis parameter can be set to each axis separately 3 The data value range in above table is the common effective range The specific parameter value range actually differs See the parameter explanation for details Example 1 Meaning of the bit and axis type parameters Data number BIT7 BIT6 BITS BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO Data number 2 Meaning of parameters other than the bit and axis type a Data number Data Note 1 The blank bits in the parameter explanation and the parameter numbers that are displayed on screen but not in parameter list are reserved for further expansion They must be set for 0 2 If 0 or 1 of the parameter is not specified with a meaning it is assumed that 1 for affirmative 0 for negative 3 If INI is set for 0 in metric input the pa
196. he setting by P282 the max value is effective If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G82 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to initial level G80 Cancel canned cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 Format G83 X Y Z RQF K Function Itis used for peck drilling that the tool feeds to the hole bottom by intermittent feeding with chips removed from hole during drilling Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bott
197. hine due to the overtravel of the X Y or Z axis 2 5 1 Hardware overtravel protection The overtravel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the machine X Y Z axis respectively If the overtravel occurs the moving axis slows down and stops after it touches the limit switch And the overtravel alarm is issued Se ee ay Diecelerating to stop g Deceleration switch 178 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Explanation Overtravel in Auto mode In Auto mode if the tool contacts the stroke limit switch during moving along an axis all the axes movement are slowed down to stop with the overtravel alarm being issued The program execution is stopped at the block where the overtravel occurs Overtravel in JOG mode In JOG mode any axis contacts the stroke limit switch all axes will slow down immediately and stop 2 5 2 Software overtravel protection The software strokes of the machine are set by the number parameters NO 66 NO 75 appendix 1 which refers to machine coordinate values Overtravel alarm occurs if the machine position coordinate exceeds the setting software stroke The alarm issued before or after overtravel for software limit overtravel is set by bit parameter No 11 7 During the overtravel alarm move the axis reversely in JOG mode the alarm will be cancelled after the axis
198. hout drilling operation _71 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Restriction gt Drilling instruction G_ _ can t be specified in a single block or alarm is issued by the system gt The canned cycle is modal instruction which is effective till it is cancelled by a G code gt G80 and G codes in 01 group are used for cancelling canned cycle gt The processing data once specified in canned cycle are effective till the canned cycle is cancelled Therefore after all the processing data required for hole machining are specified in the beginning of the canned cycle only the data to be changed is needed to be respecified in the following canned cycle Note The feedrate specified by F remains effective even the canned cycle is cancelled In single mode the canned cycle has 3 stage working type positioning R level yinitial level In canned cycle the data of hole machining and hole position will be eliminated if the system is reset The instance of dada retained and eliminated is shown as following table Table 4 4 2 Designation of Explanation data oom ooo G81 Z R F can 7 ma due to the identical hole machining mode and data specified in Drill the hole for the length Y once by G81 4 G82xX P Move in X axis relative to hole 8 Do the hole machining e e by G82 and data Z R F specified in and P in G80X Y Hole machining is not performed Cancel all the hole data G85X
199. i cect eeiciccceesta 238 TO FPO E a E E E E T E E 238 10 1 1 Program creation ccccccccccssssssessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaags 239 10 1 2 Deletion of a single program soeeeeeesssssssssssssssseetrrrrsssssssssssssseeterererssssssssssssseererrresseo 244 10 13 Deleon of all protams ep ssessncsscasuicdadescvwbsnaededendeuatieadanaidesdmeatdaedensideudectiseadansadendenandeacuenen 244 OLS Copy orap o raie E 244 10 1 5 Copy and paste of blocks nnnnnnssssssoseoeeeeenesssssssssssssseeerreressssssssssssssssseeetreeeesssssssssssssseero 245 10 1 6 Cut and paste of bloCKk nnnneennssessssssseseeeerersssssssssssssssseeerrrersssssssssssssseetrrereesssssssssssesseses 245 10 1 7 Replacement of the blocks nnnnnneesssseeooeeeeeessssssssssssssseeresssssssssssssssererressssssssssssseeeeeereo 246 TOTS Rename OF a pro TaN ees A A EA Re 246 OLS Programi Testar acneei ae EEEE EEOAE AEAEE AEAEE AEE EA 246 10 2 Program MANAGEMENT cc cccccccssssssssssceeeeeeeecececeeeeeeeesesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetttasaeeees 247 10 2 1 Prostam directory Seareh issersscssserearnnd EEEE EE saae a 247 1022 Numberof ihe proram stolede rns EEN a 248 10 2 3 Memory capacity sacicnescnccerisdnscsuatsacienbawnsanandanszdadounnsundamesinhsassesandsnagithawsiaaunduesasaaedeceuenmahans 248 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 10 2 4 Viewing of the program list
200. ill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G24 instruction F level z 5 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G24 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J10 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the inner circle fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 3 Outer circle fine milling cycle G26 G32 Format G26 G98 G99 x Y Z R L J D_ F_ K G32 Function They are used to fine mill a circle outside a circle by the specified radius and direction and the tool returns after milling 78 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Explanation For these instructions refer to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G26 CCW outer circle fine milling G32 CW outer circle fine milling l Fine milling circle radius ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use the absolute value if it is a negative one J Distance from the milling start point to milling circle center ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use the absolute value if it is a negative one D Tool radius number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool radius value is obtained by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To interpolate by the transi
201. in next moving instruction 132 CSR I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL N7 N8 N6 G91X100 0 Y100 0 N7 G40 N8 X100 0 YO 10 Corner movement If two or more vector are formed at the end of the block the tool traverses straightly to another vector from one vector the movement is called corner movement If AVXSAV limit and AVYSAV limit the hind vectors are ignored If these vectors are not consistent a movement around the corner is generated which belongs to the hind block This move belongs to block Nh thus the feedrate is equal to that in block NE lf the block Nis G00 mode the tool is moved at 00 mode while if it is G01 G02 GOS the tool is moved at G01 mode But if the path of the next block overpasses the semicircle the function above is not performed The reason is that P2 P3 P4 P5 M4 641691515002000 NWS 12002000 Me s024J 6000 Ny 014 1200 2000 Programmed path NE G40x 1500 2000 Tool center path If the vector is not ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P3 arc P4 P5 P6 P7 If the distance between P2 and P3 is ignored P3 is ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 P7 The arc cutting of the block N6 is ignored 133 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 11 Interference check The tool overcutting is called interference The Interference check
202. in workpiece coordinate system The maximum and minimum value The scaling and the graphic center are automatically set when the maximum and minimum value of the axis are set B Maximum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Maximum value of Y axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of Y axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Maximum value of Z axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of Z axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm The graphic parameters setting steps a Move the cursor to the parameter to be set b Key in the value by requirement ENTE c Press key to confirm it 2 Graphic page Press GRAPH soft key to enter this page See Fig 3 6 2 201 CGR I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL GRAPH DRAW S START T STOP MDI G PARA SWITCH START STOP ERASE Fig 3 6 2 The figure machined can be monitored in graphic page A Press s key or START soft key to enter the DRAW START mode then the signis headed to S DRAW START B Press key or STOP soft key to enter the DRAW STOP mode then the signis headed to T DRAW STOP C Press SWITCH softkey once to switch over the graph in the corresponding 0 7 coordinate display page
203. indle orientation M21 Tool search instruction in retraction M22 Tool search instruction for a new tool M23 Magazine to spindle instruction M24 Magazine retraction instruction 29 32 33 Rigid tapping Lubricating on Lubricating off M35 Helical chip remover on M36 Helical chip remover off M40 X axis mirror image 153 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL When move instruction and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block the instructions are executed in one of the following two ways 1 Simultaneous execution of the move instruction and miscellaneous function instruction 2 Executing miscellaneous function instructions on completion of the move instruction execution The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder s specification Refer to the manual by the machine builder for details When a numerial value is specified following address M code sigal and strobe signal are sent to the machine The machine uses these signals to turn on or off these functions Usually only one M code can be specified in a block in some cases up to three M codes can be specified in a block by bit parameter No 33 7 Some M codes can t be specified simultaneously for the restrictions of the mechanical operation See the machine manual by the builder for the restrictions to specify multiple M codes for the same block in mechanical operation 5 1 M codes controlled by PLC If an
204. ineffective before reference point return after power on LRP 1 The positioning GOO interpolation type is linear 0 The positioning GOO interpolation type is nonlinear RFO 1 Rapid feed stop when override is FO 0 Rapid feed not stop when override is FO TDR 1 Dry run effective during tapping 0 Dry run ineffective during tapping RDR 1 Dry run effective during cutting feeding 0 Dry run ineffective during cutting feeding FDR 1 Dry run effective during rapid positioning 0 Dry run ineffective during rapid positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01 3 HPC NPC NPC 1 Feed per revolution effective with no position encoder 0 Feed per revolution ineffective with no position encoder HPC 1 Position encoder installed 0 Position encoder not installed Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 01 4 DLF HFC HFC 1 Clamp combined by straight line and arc for helical interpolation feedrate Q Clamp by straight line and arc separately for helical interpolation feedrate DLF 1 Reference point return by manual feed after reference point is setup and memorized 0 Reference point return by rapid traverse after reference point is setup and 261 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL memorized Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 1 5
205. ing l Rectangular groove width in X axis J Rectangular groove width in Y axis L Cutting width increment within a specified plane which should be less than the tool diameter and over 0 W Initial cut depth in Z axis which is a downward distance from R level and is over 0 if the initial cut exceeds the groove bottom it will cut at the bottom position Cut depth of each cutting feed Distance to the end surface to be machined in rapid feed which is over 0 Corner radius no corner transition if omitted oe E Tool diameter number ranging within O 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions 80 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 To cut a W depth downward by a federate 4 To mill a rectangular surface helically from center outward by L increment each time 5 Z axis rapids to R level 6 X Y axes rapidly locates to the rectangle center 7 Z axis rapids down to a position that has a V distance to the end surface 8 Z axis cuts downward fora Q V depth 9 Repeat the actions of 4 8 till the rectangular surface with the total depth is machined 0 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path a 2 Point F eee gt Rapid feed 5 _ _ gt Cutting feed
206. input 999 999mm inch input 99 9999 inch Wear offset metric input 99 999mm inch input 9 9999 inch Note For inch and metric switch the tool offset value automatic change is set by bit parameter No 41 0 4 6 Feed G code 4 6 1 Feed mode G64 G61 G63 Format Dwell exact stop mode G61 Tapping mode G63 Cutting mode G64 Function Dwell mode G61 Once specified this function is effective till G62 G63 or G64 is specified The tool is decelerated for an in position check at the end point of a block then next block is executed Tapping mode G63 Once specified this function is effective till G62 G61 or G64 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block but the next block is executed When G63 is specified feedrate override and feed hold are both ineffective Cutting mode G64 Once specified this function is effective till G62 G61 or G63 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block and the next block is executed 139 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Explanation No parameter format G64 is the system default feed mode no deceleration is performed at the end point of a block and next block is executed directly The purpose of in position check in dwell mode is to check whether the servo motor has reached within a specified range In exact stop mode the tool movement paths in cutting mode and tapping mode are different See following
207. int R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level 102 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 G86 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 18 Boring cycle G89 Format G89 X Y Z RPF K Function It is used to bore a hole Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 689 G98 689 G99 dee P_ Point R Point R Point R level Point Z This cycle is almost the same as G85 The difference is that this cycle perfoms a dwell at the hole bottom 103 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC sy
208. ion Functions of B EDIT are the same as the lt EDIT gt mode that is described in CHAPTER 10 Program Edit Save the editing by B LOGIN Jor exit the background EDIT page by RETURN after editing 2 MDI display Press MDI soft key to enter MDI page in this mode multiple blocks can be edited and executed The program format is the same as the editing program MDI mode is applicable to simple program testing operation See Fig 3 2 3 PROGRAM MDI 000002 N0120 000000 ABSOLUTE GOO G17 G90 G94 G54 G21 G40 G49 X 0 0000 G98 G15 G50 G69 Y 0 0000 F 0 AF 0 Z 0 0000 S O M 30 H 0000 D 0000 DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 3 2 3 3 Program CUR MOD display Press CUR MOD soft key to enter current mode interface it displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the current mode MDI data input and running are available in MDI mode See Fig 3 2 4 186 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PROGRAM CURRENT MODAL 000002 N0120 CURRENT MODAL GOO 1000 G17 1000 G90 30 G94 0000 G54 0000 G21 0000 ABSOLUTE G11 X 0 0000 G98 Y 0 0000 G15 4 0 0000 G50 G69 SPRM 02500 G64 SMAX 100000 wet S0000 T0100 PRG MDI CUR NXTI DIR T aT T D U r na W Ne NK AK Fig 3 2 4 4 Program CUR NXT display Press CUR NXT soft key to enter current next interface It displays the instructions of the blocks bein
209. ion When the sstem perfornrns the machine zero return operation the machine sider moves in the positive direction And the T1 part on the inductive block touches the approaching Switch the system sows down Attention should be paid that the width of Tifusually not less than 25mm must ensure the deceleration completion tram the speed of zero retum to the speed O set by parameter 99 the width of T2 should be more than the measunng diameter of the switch T3 is the zero in position point The approaching switch is WPM Hormal close type e The interval between T1 and T2 is break off date The internals between T2 and others are through Machine Zero type of bok21oh system A 235 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL feo retin type using stepper motor with no encocer 5 Machine zero etun director machine slider Explanation When the system perform the machine zero return operation approaching switch sig the machine slider moves to negative directon issent to the deceleration ifthe tongue presses dawn the stroke switch the system slows down mero Interface of GSEZ218M Atenton should be paid that the width usually not less than 2 mnhof the tongue should ensure the deceleration fromthe speed of zero return to the speed F L set by parameter Yay when the stroke switch detaches the tongue the system stops immediate hy with the completion of zero return Machine Zero type of GoOk41oM
210. ion the value in current machine coordinate system will be set for the origin of the G coordinate system ENTER e g If X is pressed and then key the X machine coordinate of a point is entered ENTER automatically by system If X10 is entered and then press key which means X machine coordinate is 10 and X 10 may also be entered 2 After entering this page in lt MDI gt mode move the cursor to the coordinate axis to be altered input the machine coordinates or other values directly to define the G coordinate system ENTER Origin press key for confirmation 3 5 4 Display and setting of the machine soft panel 1 Press PANEL soft key to enter machine panel page which is shown as following See Fig 3 5 4 196 CGSB P HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL MACHINE PANEL O00002 N0120 RELATIVE f a00 R i ee E tons X 0 0000 mas Guna DUCS oo MUS ol Y 0 0000 X Y 7 D STH 4 5 6 PEELE Z 0 0000 JOG MPG oe AREER X 0 0000 HEO diti We E AT ae Y 0 0000 nA 4a D GY 4th e m DRY RUN DD FEED HOLD Z 0 0000 a any ee ie lola FEED OVRD 100 F iiS ya a g apa RAPID OVRD 100 4th ey f z LUB COOLING g OVERTRAVEL S0000 T0100 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO I gt Fig 3 5 4 2 Usage The functions of all soft keys on machine soft panel are identical with that of the keys on machine panel In this page the soft key
211. is as above 7 10 Spindle override in auto run In auto run the spindle speed can be overriden if it is controlled by analog quantity The spindle speed can be overriden by pressing spindle override keys The spindle override ascends for a gear 5 till 150 each time the pressed The spindle override descends for a gear 5 till 0 each time the key is pressed The actual spindle soeed speed specified spindle override The max spindle speed is set by number parameter No 258 if the spindle speed exceeds the max value set it uses the max speed 7 11 Cooling control key in the panel to switch on the cooling on off this key is a compound key The cooling indicator lighting up means the cooling ON indicator gone off means the cooling OFF 231 CGSR I H GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 7 12 Background edit in auto run The background edit function in processing is supported in this system During the program execution in Auto mode press lt PROGRAMb gt key to enter the program page then press PROG soft key to enter the background edit interface as is shown in Fig 7 12 1 PROGRAM 000002 N0120 N0180 N0240 N0300 N0360 N0420 N0180 N0180 DATA XO GOl X50 Y50 F2000 G41 X100 Dl GO1 Y100 GO2 X200 R50 GO1l YO F2500 XO Y50 Ln 2 AUTO BG EDT BG END J CHECK LSAVE RETURN P Fig 7 12 1 Press B EDIT soft key to enter the program b
212. is reference point Setting range 0 9999 0219 Pitch error compensation number of 4TH axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0220 Pitch error compensation number of 5TH axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0221 Pitch error compensation points of X axis 256 Setting range O 1000 0222 Pitch error compensation points of Y axis 256 Setting range O 1000 0223 Pitch error compensation points of Z axis 256 Setting range O 1000 0224 Pitch error compensation points of 4TH axis 256 Setting range O 1000 0225 Pitch error compensation points of 5TH axis 256 Setting range O 1000 0226 Pitch error compensation interval of X axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0227 Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 296 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0228 Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0229 Pitch error compensation interval of 4TH axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0230 Pitch error compensation interval of 5TH axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0231 Pitch error compensation override of X axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0232 Pitch error compensation override of Y axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0233 Pitch error compensation override of Z axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0234 Pitch error compensation override of 4TH axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0235 Pitch error compensation o
213. is used to search a special address word or number in a program and it is usually used for editing Steps for sequence number line number or word search 1 Select mode lt Edit gt or lt Auto gt 2 Look up the target program in DIR page ENTER 3 Press key to enter the target program 4 Key in the word or sequence number to be searched and press UP or DOWN keys to look for it SERGE 5 Ifthe line number in program is needed to be searched press key key in the ENTER line number to be searched and press key for confirmation Note The search function is automatically cancelled when the sequence number word searching reaches the end of the program 10 1 1 4 Location of the cursor PROGRAM Select Edit mode then press key to display the program a Press 2 key to shift the cursor upward for a line if the column where the cursor sI CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL locates exceeds the end column of the last line the cursor moves to the end of the last line Press 2 key to shift the cursor downward for a line if the column where the b cursor locates exceeds the end column of the next line the cursor moves to the end of the next line c Press key to move the cursor for a column to the right if the cursor is at the line end it moves to the beginning of the next line d Press cj key to move the cursor for a column to the left if the cursor is at the beginning of th
214. itable Position message 5001 5030 read only unwritable Workpiece zero offset value 5201 5235 readable and writable Additional workpiece coordinate system 7001 7250 readable and writable 3 Precautions for custom macro body 1 Input by keys Press key behind the parameter words G X Y Z R J K F H M S T P Q for inputting 145 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 2 3 Either operation or transfer instruction can be specified in MDI mode Except G65 other parameter data can be input by keys but can t be displayed H P Q Roof the operation and transfer instructions preceding or behind G65 are all used as parameters for G65 H02 G65 P 100 Q 101 R 102 Correct N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q10 Correct Variable range 99999 99999 The result of the variable operation can be a decimal fraction with a precision of 0 0001 All operations except H11 OR operation H12 AND operation H13 NOT operation H23 ROUNDING operation with decimal portion neglected in operation are done without the decimal portions abnegated Example 100 35 101 10 102 5 110 100 101 3 5 111 110x 102 17 5 120 100x 102 175 121 120 101 17 5 The execution time of operation and transfer instruction differs depending on different conditions usually the average time is 10ms See the details for common variables operation in OPERATION MANU
215. ither added or cancelled while positioning to point R level In feeding per minute the relation between the thread lead and feedrate as well as spindle speed is as following Feedrate F tap pitchxspindle speed S For example for the M12x1 5 thread hole on the workpiece the following parameter can be used S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min For multi start thread F value can be gotten by multiplying the thread number Example M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G84 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning tap hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning tap hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning tap hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning tap hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction _ 93 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 12 Left handed tapping cycle G74 Format G74X Y Z RP F_ Function It is used for tapping cycle In this tapping cycle when the hole bottom is reached the spindle rotates reversely Explanation XY H
216. ive When a tool path is programmed as A and the offset value is set for negative the tool center moves as in B if a tool path is programmed as B and the offset value is set for negative the tool center moves as in A The figure with acute angles is often used with sharp angle arc interpolation figure If the offset value is set for negative the inner side of the workpiece can t be cut When cutting the inner sharp angle in a point interpolate an arc with a proper radius at the point for smooth cutting transition The compensation for left or right is judged by the compensation direction workpiece unmoved to the direction of the tool movement relative to the workpiece By G41or G42 the system enters compensation mode and by G40 the compensation mode is cancelled The example for compensation program is as following The block 1 in which the compensation cancel mode is changed for compensation mode by G41 instruction is called start At the block end the tool center is compensated by the tool radius that is vertical to the next block from P1 to P2 The offset value is specified by DO 7 i e the offset 119 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL number is set for 7 and G41 specifies the tool path compensation left During the offset the workpiece figure is programmed as P1 gt P2 P9 P10 P11 and the tool path compensation is performed automatically Program example for the tool pat
217. l the offset paths of the arcs has an intersection ifthe radius gets larger the Intersection may not exist The tool stops at the end of the last block and alarm is issued 124 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL i Arc center coincides with the start point or end point G41 N5 G01 4100 0 N6 GO 4100 0 10 JO Tool center path N7 G03 100 0 J 100 0 e As the figure shows alarm is issued and the control stops at the end of last block Programmed path 4 Tool movement in offset cancel mode In offset mode when the block complies to any of the following condition is executed the system enters offset cancell mode The operation of this block is called offset cancel a Instruction G40 b When the tool radius compensation number is 0 Arc instruction G03 or G02 is unallowed in offset cancel mode Alarm is issued and tool Stops if arc is specified a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 0 Linear sLinear UD Circular Linear Workpiece Programmed path Tool center path Programmed path Tool center path b Tool movement around an inner side of a corner 90 lt a lt 180 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Linear linear Circular linear Programmed path Programmed path Tool center path 125 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL
218. lculates GG 7 automatically and input the result to the space behind the sign 214 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 Manual Operation The JOG mode that contains JOG feed spindle control and machine panel control can be g i JOG entered by pressing key 4 1 Coordinate axis movement In JOG mode the 3 axes can be moved by JOG feed or manual rapid traverse separately 4 1 1 Manual feed a X X axis can be moved to positive or negative direction of by pressing and holding the _ X or _ 4 Jkey in Feed Axis and Direction Selection area If the key is released the X axis movement stops And the feedrate can be overriden to change the feed rate that of the Y and Z axes are the same as X axis The three axes simultaneous moving are not available in this system but the simultaneous zeroing of three axes is supported by the system Note The axis JOG feedrate is set by parameter No 098 the manual rapid traverse is set by parameters No 088 No 092 4 1 2 Manual rapid traverse F Pu RAPI Press D key till the indicator for rapid traverse on panel lights up Then press manual RAPID key each axis will traverses rapidly Note 1 The manual rapid speeds are set by the parameter No 088 092 Note 2 The effective manual rapid traverse before reference return is set by the bit parameter No 12 0 4 1 3 JOG feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection The manual feed
219. lect the files to be transferred multiple files can be selected by pressing and 253 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL holding SHIFT or CTRL key 5 Click Start receiving button for receiving and the following dialogue block will be popped up wot a fam wep FRA E Petes fe a 6 Transmission is over 11 2 USB communication 11 2 1 Overview and precautions 1 This U disk system only supports FAT16 file system if your U disk format is FAT32 or others please format your U disk to FAT format in advance or it won t be identified by this system Due to the detachment of the U disk system and the CNC system the U disk system can t be entered during the processing or the workpiece may be damaged It is better to copy all the programs in U disk before processing This U disk system supports hot plug and play for many times make sure that the USB interface is not inserted by U disk before power on If inserted the U disk will not be identified It is better to insert U disk after the U disk operation interface is entered When the U disk operation is finished pull out the U disk after waiting for a while till the indicator for U disk does not blink it will avoid the U disk data not fully operated This U disk only displays the program text file with the name O five digit number i e the program extension name is TXT 11 2 2 Preparation 1 2 3 After CNC system set I O cha
220. ls from machine this function can be used e g used for grinding It can also be used for measuring the workpiece dimensions Explanation 1 G31 is a non modal G code that is only effective in a specified block 2 Alarm occurs if G31 is given during the tool radius compensation The tool radius compensation should be cancelled before G31 instruction Example The block after G31 is a single axis moving specified by incremental values as Fig 4 2 16 1 shows 631 G91X 100 0 F100 50 0 r Skip signal is input here BO Y 100 0 Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 1 A single axis moving specified by incremental values of next block 62 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The block after G31 is a single axis moving specified by absolute values as Fig 4 2 16 2 shows G31 G90X 200 00 F100 Y100 0 Y100 0 f Skip signal is input here 3 X X200 0 Actual motion Sere Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 2 Single axis moving specified by absolute values of next block The block after G31 is 2 axis moving specified by absolute values as Fig 4 2 16 3 shows G31 G90X 200 0 F100 300 0 100 0 Y Skip signal is input here 100 300 100 Actual motion Motion without skip signal x 100 200 300 Fig 4 2 16 3 2 axis moving specified by absolute values of next block 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 Format G20 input by inch sy
221. m loading in Edit mode a Press key to enter the Edit mode b Press key to enter the program page move the cursor to find the target program ENTER c Press key for confirmation z d Press key to enter the Auto mode 7 2 Auto run start After select the program by the two ways of section 7 1 above press eee key to execute the program the program execution can be viewed by switching to lt POSITION gt lt MONITOR gt lt GRAPH etc interfaces 226 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The program execution is started from the line where the cursor locates so check that whether the cursor is located at the program to be executed before pressing the key If the cursor is not located at the start line from which the program is to be executed press reset key MW then press ee key to run the program automatically from the start line 7 3 Auto run stop In Auto run to make the program being executed automatically to be stopped five ways are provided in this system 1 Program stop MOO After the block containing MOO is executed the auto running pauses and the modal message is saved If key is pressed the program execution is continued 2 Program optional stop M01 If the OPTIONAL STOP M01 key is pressed during the program execution the automatic running pauses and the modal message is saved when the block containing M01 is being executed
222. meter and program switch The operation steps are as following Ca Enter the lt MDI gt mode the parameter on is in MDI mode and the parameter off and the program on and off may be in any mode Cb Enter the lt SET gt page input the corresponding password in the 2 PSD page of the SETTING Cc Move the cursor to the items to be altered in the parameter or program d Set the parameter or program switch by pressing Left or Right cursor key When the parameter switch is set for OFF the system parameter modification and setting are 195 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL unallowed when the program switch is set for OFF the program editting is unallowed too 3 5 3 Coordinate setting interface 1 Press G54 G59 soft key to enter coordinate setting interface which is shown as following Fig 3 5 3 SETTING G54 G59 000002 N0120 CURRENT WORKPIECE G54 MACHINE G54 G55 x 0 00000 X 0 0000 0 0000 Y 0 00000 Y 0 0000 0 0000 Z 0 00000 Z 0 0000 0 0000 EXT G56 G57 0 00000 X 0 0000 0 0000 0 00000 Y 0 0000 0 0000 0 00000 Z 0 0000 0 0000 DATA s0000 T0100 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 3 2 There two ways for coordinate entry 1 After entering this page in lt MDI gt mode move the cursor to the coordinate system to ENTER be altered Press the axis name to be assigned and then press key for confirmat
223. meter number Sequence number to be modified P Parameter bit number Bit number to be modified 45 CGS I HIS F GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL R Value Parameter value after it modified The values can also be modified by following instructions refer to relative sections for details G10L2 PX Y ZAB Setor modify external zero offset or workpiece zero offset G10 L10P_R_ Set or modify length offset G10 L11P_ R Set or modify length wear G10 L12P R Set or modify radius offset G10L13P R Set or modify radius wear G10L20P_X_Y ZA B Setor modify additional workpiece zero offset Note In parameter input mode except annotation statement other NC statement can t be specified G10 must be specified in a single block or the alarm occurs It should be noted that the parameter input mode must be cancelled by G11 for after G10 for program normal use The parameter value modified by G10 must be within the system parameter range If not alarm occurs The canned cycle mode must be cancelled prior to G10 execution or alarm occurs 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 Format G54 G59 Function It specifies the current workpiece coordinate system It is used to select workpiece coordinate system by specifying workpiece coordinate system G code in program Explanation 1 No instruction parameter 2 6 workpiece coordinate system can be set in the system any of which can be selected by G54 G59 inst
224. n t be stored as a modal datum If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the tapping axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Alarm occurs if the tapping axis is changed in rigid mode If S and axis movement instructions are specified between M29 and G84 alarm is issued If M29 is specified in a tapping cycle alarm is also issued In feed per minute mode the thread lead is obtained from the expression federate spindle speed Feedrate of Z axis spindle speedxthread lead Example Spindle soeed1000r min Thread lead1 0mm then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 1000mm min G00 X120 Y100 Positioning M29 1000 Rigid mode specified G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restriction F Alarm is issued if the F value specified exceeds the upper limit of the cutting feedrate S Alarm is issued if the rotation speed exceeds the max speed of the gear specified which is set by number parameter P294 297 Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored Program restart Itis ineffective during the rigid tapping 4 4 20 Left handed rigid tapping G74 Format G74 X_Y ZRPF K _ Function In rigid tapping the spindle is controlled by a servo motor This ins
225. n E E OEE 197 3 5 6 Backup restore and transfer of the data cccssssssssssseeececeeeceeeeeeeeseseesessseseseeeeeeeeeees 198 3 5 7 Password authority setting and modification cc cceeeeesesecececeeeceeeeeaeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 199 36 Graphic CIS DAY seosicaceesiesesucsnstsessooesiessasisvss non teesasaeestannaaeeiannteasvanauaniaisnsaneintcabanadennasaeaeoase 200 Del Diagnosis CIS AY essasi nae IAEE EEEE EEEE 202 IL WIGS WOSIS Caida ense E 202 Dolce Sonal VIC W 11S esena nni E E E AE 205 3 8 Alarm display srcnsdsressosccvsssesdsosisasssoscinadsvansosivesctosbsunstasssundbosdsnsdiondsoncbeidiaadiesssanddoadeentesdsoncieadeaeds 205 3o PESCUDAR 208 LIO mm 96 ODay e E E 210 4 Manual OperatiOn esseeeesceesessssooooooocceecceseseescssooocooceceeeeeeeeescoooooooooceeeeeeeesecssoosoooooeeeeeeseeeesessoosoeeeee 215 4 1 Coordinate axis movement ssessseseseseseseresssseessttssressresstesseessetssressressteseresreestessressressees 215 4 1 1 Manual feed x tarotnantaaasnatanccsuuotacaitenianaetnansnandbatnuestinisteraiuatanantnantaceieabimedtsdariaadhatananmanheasenatonns 215 4 12 Manual rapid CAV CUS esa savausananuatmhessconnneanepanues dgemnauslAs scacesiaeansicehelnanseaidmaaaasaeiouaesiioonduaitieivadaces 215 4 1 3 JOG feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection cccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 215 4 1 4 Manual intervention cccccccccccccccccceneseeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesasa
226. n for cutting feed and rapid traverse separately 0 To perform backlash compensation for cutting feed and rapid traverse together RVCS 1 Backlash compensation type ascending or decending 0 Backlash compensation type fixed frequency Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 019 lov ALMS ALMS5 ALMS4 ALMSz ALMSY ALMSX ALMX 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALMY 1 High level effective of driver alarm 263 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALMZ 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALM4 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALM5 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm IOV 1 High level effective of override signal 0 Low level effective of override signal Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number o 20 pr mx mL ITL 1 All axes interlock signal effective 0 All axes interlock signal ineffective ITX 1 Each axis interlock signal effective 0 Each axis interlock signal ineffective DIT 1 Each axis direction interlock signal effective 0 Each axis direction interlock signal ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 1 ENG CHI
227. n in forecasting control 0 01 Setting range O 0 5 mm 0140 Blocks merged in forecasting control Setting range O 10 0141 In position precision in forecasting control 0 05 Setting range O 0 5 mm 0142 Length condition of circular formation in forecasting control Setting range 0 30 0143 Angular condition of circular formation in forecasting 10 control Setting range 0 30 0144 Critical angle of the two blocks during automatic corner deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 0 90 mm min 0145 Minimum feedrate of automatic corner deceleration 120 in forecasting control Setting range 10 1000 mm min 0146 Axis error allowable for speed difference deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 60 1000 290 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0147 Cutting precision grade in forecasting control Setting range 0 8 0148 External acceleration limit of circular interpolation 1000 Setting range 100 5000 mm s 0149 Lower limit of the external acceleration clamp for 200 circular interpolation Setting range O 2000 mm min 0150 Acceleration clamp time constant of cutting feed 50 Setting range O 1000 ms 0151 Maximum clamp speed of handwheel incomplete 2000 running Setting range O 3000 mm min 0152 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 120 handwheel Setting range O 400 ms 0153 Exponential acceleration deceleration time co
228. names at most If the CNC programs are over 10 they can t be fully displayed in a page so press the PAGE key to display the program names on the next page If the page key is pressed continuously all the CNC program names will be displayed by cycle on LCD CANGE Because the programs are listed by their name sizes press ome key to view them and 2218 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL the programs will be listed by the date sequence with the latest modified program headed 10 2 5 Program lock The program switch is set in this system to protect the user programs to be modified by unauthorized personnel After the program editing set the program switch for OFF to lock the program And the program edit is disabled See Section 3 5 1 for its explanation 249 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 11 Communication This system can communicate with PC or USB via interface connection 11 1 Serial communication The serial communication software of this GSK218M system uses Windows interface which is used to send and receive files or execute DNC machining from PC terminal to CNC terminal This software can be run in Win98 WinMe WinXP or Win2K operation systems 11 1 1 Program start Run the CommGSK218M exe program directly The interface of it is as following Joskeism BOM Wat E iol x FE fE BOC fad eo AER H De SHF Eee p70 bsi Bem San ext a T ma
229. nd F Explanation 1 The decimal point programming are set by bit parameter NO 33 1 If bit parameter NO 33 1 1 the programming value unit is mm inch or deg if bit parameter NO 33 1 0 the programming value unit is the min moving unit which is set by bit parameter NO 5 1 2 The decimal part that is less than the min input incremental unit should be omitted Example X9 8 654 When the min input incremental unit is 0 001mm it should be X 9 876 When the min input incremental unit is 0 0001mm it should be X 9 8765 saja CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 Preparatory Function G code 4 1 Classification of G code Preparatory function is represented by G code with the number behind it which defines the meaning of the block that contains it G codes are devided by the following two types Non modal G Effective in the block in which it is code specified Effective till another G code of the same modal G code group is specified Example G01 and GOO are modal G code in the same group G01 X __ Z O01 effective X G01 effective G00 Z G00 effective Note Refer to system parameter list modal list for details Table 4 1 G codes and their functions Group Instruction format Function m code Positioning Positioning traverse Linear interpolation cutting feed Circular interpolation CW Circular interpolation CCW Circular interpolation CCW CCW G04 P_
230. neuanteee 6 N7 G01 Z 41 F200 ossis ccs 7 N8 GOO ZAT ceecccnny steer seshedestenesiecdee 8 N9 POON OO y aasa ani ii 9 N10 G01 Z 25 F100 asses eee 10 N11 G04 P2000 acesse eee dd N12 G00 Z57 HOO oe 12 N13 X 200 Y 60 oo ee eee 13 N14 M30 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Format G41D XY G42D_ XY G40 X_Y_ Function G41 specifies the left offset of the tool moving 114 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G42 specifies the right offset of the tool moving G40 specifies the tool radius compensation cancel Explanation 1 Tool radius compensation As following figure to cut workpiece A using the tool with the radius R the tool center path is shown as B the distance from B to A is R the distance that the tool deviates from the workpiece A is called compensation E Offset tool center path Programmed pathi ector Ofset and vector The tool radius compensation is programmed for machining program by programmer During the machining the tool diameter is measured and input into the CNC memory And the tool path turns into a offset path B 2 Offset value D value The radius offset number is specified by D code and the new moving instruction value is obtained by the value of the offset number plusing or subtracting the moving value of the program The offset number can be specified by DOO D127 as required The diameter or radius value of it
231. ng G99 G22 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 L10 W20 Q10 V10 F800 Groove rough milling cycle within a circle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canned cycle cancel and return from R level M30 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle within a circle G24 G25 Format G24 G98 G99 x Y Z R_L J D_ F_ K G25 Function They are used to fine mill a circle by a radius and direction specified and the tool returns after milling Explanation G24 CCW fine milling within a circle G25 CW fine milling within a circle l Milling circle radius ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use absolute value if itis a negative one J Distance of fine milling start point to circle center ranging with O mm 9999 999mm use absolute value if it is a negative one D Tool diameter number ranging within O 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The tool diameter value is obtained by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To interpolate by the transition arc 1 from the start point ae CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 6 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by arc 2 arc 3 7 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path Example To fine m
232. ng cutting feedrate For example GO X0 Y10 F800 rapid traversing by system parameter set G1 X20 Y50 by F800 feedrate The rapid feedrate is adjusted by the key on operator panel with following override FO 25 50 100 see Fig 2 4 1 2 The speed for FO is set by number parameter P93 and 35 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL they are used by all axes eg Esg lf poe aor 0 501 0 01 U1 1 Fig 2 4 1 2 Rapid feedrate override key 2 G00 is unallowed to be programmed in a block with the same group modal G codes such as G01 G02 G03 otherwise alarm is issued by system 4 2 2 Linear interpolation G01 Format G01X_Y_Z F_ Function The tool moves along a line to the specified position at the feedrate mm min specified by parameter F Explanation 1 X Y_ Z arethe final point coordinate which concerns the coordinate system refer to 3 3 1 3 3 3 sections 2 The feedrate specified by F is effective till the new F code is specified The feedrate by F code is got by an interpolation along a line if F code is not specified in program the feedrate uses the default value when the power is on see number parameter P87 for the setting Program example see Fig 4 2 2 1 Y axis G01 X200 Y100 F200 100 0 End position Note Each axis feedrate is as following 0 Startposition 200 0 G01 Xa YB ZyFf In this block 36 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION
233. nned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G83 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q15 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R level 9 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 11 Right handed tapping cycle G84 Format G84 X_Y_ Z RP F_ Function It is used for tapping In tapping when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle runs reversely Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute co
234. nnel value for 2 in lt SETTING gt page Enter into the DATA page in lt SETTING gt page move the cursor to CNC part program PartPrg in English interface in MDI mode press ENTER key then wait the U disk program to start After entering into U disk program insert U disk 11 2 3 Operation 1 To copy CNC programs from U disk to user disk a Press USB key to switch to U disk b Press Up and Down keys to select the CNC file in U disk c Press COPY button after the prompt is shown press ENTER key to start copying d After copying the corresponding prompt will be given by the system To delete files from U disk a Press USB key to switch to U disk 254 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL b Select the CNC file in U disk c Press DEL button after the prompt is shown press ENTER key 3 To copy CNC program from system user disk to U disk a Press CNC key to switch to the user disk b Select the CNC file in user disk c Press COPY button after the prompt is shown press ENTER key to start copying d After the copying is finished the corresponding prompt will be given by the system 4 To delete files from the system user disk a Press CNC key to switch to the user disk b Select the CNC file in user disk c Press DEL button after the prompt is shown press ENTER key 11 2 4 U disk system exit 1 Pull out U disk as t
235. nstant of handwheel Setting range O 400 ms 0154 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel 100 Setting range O 400 ms 0155 Maximum clamp speed of step feed 1000 Setting range O 3000 mm min 0156 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 100 axes JOG feed Setting range O 400 ms 0157 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant 120 of axes JOG feed Setting range O 400 ms 0160 Multiplication coefficient of X axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 291 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0161 Multiplication coefficient of Y axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0162 Multiplication coefficient of Z axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0163 Multiplication coefficient of 4TH axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0164 Multiplication coefficient of 5TH axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0165 Frequency dividing coefficient of X axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 0166 Frequency dividing coefficient of Y axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 0167 Frequency dividing coefficient of Z axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 0168 Frequency dividing coefficient of 4TH axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 0169 Frequency dividing coefficient of 5TH axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 0170 Servo loop gain of X axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0171 Setting range
236. nt and complete production and quality system qualified by us will undoubtedly ensure the reliable product to serve our customers 24 48 hours technological support and service can be easily and promptly provided by our complete service mechanism and tens of service offices distributed in provinces around China and abroad The pursuit of excellent product and superexcellent service has made the GSK what it is now and we will spare no efforts to continue to consummate this South China NC industry base and enhance our national NC industry by our managerial concept of century enterprise golden brand CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Technological Spot Service You can ask for spot service if you have the problems that can t be solved by telephone We will send the engineers authorized to your place to resolve the technological problems for you Foreword Your excellency It s our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK GSK218M CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is Programming and Operation Manual accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please carefully read this manual before usage This manual is reserved by final user All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without further notice We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for su
237. ntesstoootientaantasttesstnetes 26 SE 8 182 9 E EE E E E A A E eee eee eee ee eee 26 33 Coordinate Syste iss sssssescarctecseavsconsearctacsvoyetinseohetnsbabessaavohatonsand NEEE EENE EEEE E E ries 26 Boel Mac mne CODE UMIAIC syslen iaa ai a RARA 26 Ie BE ENE PO e aa E E E AA E AAE RE 26 9 3 9 Workpiece COOTCINATS syster sessen area 2l 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming sesssssssseeeooeeeeeesssssssssssssssssseererrrressssss 28 Oe Mode and NOn MOLO sensns n N 30 3 5 Decimal point programming eseeeeeeessssssssessseserrrrrerssssssssserrrrererrressssssssssrrerreeeereesssssssssererereet 31 4 Preparatory Function G cCOde sseeessssecccceeesssoceceeceessocccceeeessocccceeeeesoooceeeeeeesoocceeeeeesosceceeeesssoocceeee 32 4 1 Classification Of G COQS ea ene men nen EE OE 32 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL dA 0 O COG nn nn oe ee a ae ne ee ne Seno nee ne anne ee nee eee ee ee 35 4 2 1 Rapid positioning GOO soscucsssoxsvinensaneiconnsiiesenasessaetnadiinaniaeiineadacmmecennvendeaeeeniaanamaunmonebenennitias 35 4 2 2 Linear interpolation GU lossas daetiaadansdideddnesicesswnaddedstuetdseiansseawsenatsntesiddens 36 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 cccccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseeseees 37 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 ssnsssssssesseeeeeresssssssssssssssesererrsessssssssssssseeees 43 BD Dwell GUA
238. o instruction The custom macro body is also abreviated for macro The custom macro instruction is also called macro calling instruction 142 CGR I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Custom macro body Main program A group of instructipns Cu for a special functidn stom macro command Variables can be used in custom macro body and they can be operated and assigned by macro instructions 4 7 2 Custom macro instruction Custom macro instruction is used to call custom macro body Format M98 P oooooLooo lL Calling times Number of the custom macro body called By instruction above except the file reserved by system the macro body specified by P can be called System files are reserved files which include 9O000 99999 4 7 3 Custom macro Both the common CNC instructions and the variables operation as well as the transfer instructions can be used in the custom macro body It begins with program number and ends with M99 O8000 Program number G65 Hol QCperation instruction G90 GOO X 101 CNC instructions using variables GAB Heo Transter instruction M99 Custom macro body ends The composition of custom macro body 1 Variables usage 143 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL With a variable the parameter value in custom macro body can be specified The variable value can be assigned by the main program or set by LCD
239. ol radius compensation value An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other after they are shifted by r O indicates the center of the tool 1 Tool movement in start up When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode the tool moves as illustrated below start up 121 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear sLinear Linear Circular Workpiece Programmed path t ofset value Tool center path Start position Tool center path Programmed path Start position r offset value b Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 gt a290 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Linear Circular Linear linear start position Start position Tool center path Tool center path Linear Linear Linear Circular oat posan Start position t offset value Workpiece Frogrammed path B Tool center path intersection Intersection is the position where offset Intersection paths of two successive blocks intersect L Tool wera oath Programmed path 122 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL C Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 tool path types at offset s
240. olation AD2 1 Make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block 0 Do not make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 0 3 3 M3B EOR Moe M30 M02 POL NOP NOP 1 Block with only program number EOB sequence number ignored 268 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Block with only program number EOB sequence number preread POL 1 To program using decimal point 0 To program not using decimal point M02 1 To return to block beginning when M02 is being executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M02 is being executed M06 1 Machine equipped with manipulator magazine 0 Machine equipped with cloke magazine M30 1 To return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed EOR 1 To make alarm if occurs in execution 0 To reset if occurs in execution M3B 1 At most three M codes allowable in a section of program 0 Only one M code allowable in a section of program Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number CFH 1 cH ow G04 for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode G04 not for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode To clear F H D codes at reset or emergency stop To reserve F H D codes at reset or emergency
241. ole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate G74 G98 G74 G99 Initial level ae i ao spindle CCW y Spindle Dwell CCW Dwell Point R Dwell Dwell Point R Point Z Point Z N spindle CW spindle CW Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle CCW when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle is rotated reversely for retraction This operation creates threads Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the retraction operation is finished Before specifying G74 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CCW rotation is not specified it will be adjusted for CCW rotation in R level automatically by the current spindle speed specified If G74 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation 94 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole
242. om of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Q Depth of cut for each cutting feed F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 90 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G83 G98 G83 G99 Initial level A Point R re Point Z Fig 4 4 4 1 Q It specifies each cutting depth expressed by incremental value In the second and the following feeding the tool rapidly traverse to the position which has a distance d to the end position of last drilling and still performs the feeding d that is set by parameter P270 as is shown in Fig 4 4 4 1 Only positive value can be specified for Q and the negative value is used as a positive one with its negative sign ignored Q is specified in drilling block it can t be stored as a modal datum if it is specified in the block containing no drilling The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G83 is specified If G83 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in ca
243. on G01 or circular interpolation G02 G03 a chamfering or corner rounding is automatically done in the machining Blocks specifying chamfering and corner rounding can be specified consecutively Explanation 1 Blocks specifying chamfering and corner rounding can only be inserted between the linear interpolation blocks 2 The chamfering after L is used to specify the distance from the virtual corner point to the start and the end point The virtual corner point is the corner point that exists if chamfering is not performed As the following figure shows 64 CGSER I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 G91 G01 X100 0 L10 0 2 X100 0 Y100 0 inserted chamfering block Virtual comer intersection 3 The corner rounding after R is used to specify the radius for corner As the following figure shows 1 G91 G01 X100 0 R10 0 2 X100 0 100 0 Center of a circle with radius R Restriction 1 Chamfering and corner rounding can only be performed in the plane specified and these functions can t be performed for parallel axes 2 A block specifying chamfering or corner rounding must be followed by a block that specifies a linear interpolation If next block is not linear block alarm is issued 3 A chamfering or corner rounding block can be inserted only for move instructions which are performed in the same plane If plane is switched neither chamfering nor corner rounding can be s
244. on 5 2 Step interruption If the control is switched to MPG mode by a dwell it will execute MPG interruption see section 6 2 MPG interruption If the control is switched to JOG mode by a dwell it will execute manual intervention see section 4 1 4 Manual interruption When the control is switched to Step MPG JOG Machine Zero mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the system will execute deceleration and stop eye CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 9 Machine Zero Operation 9 1 Conception of machine zero The machine coordinate system is the inherent coordinate system by machine Its origin is called mechanical zero or machine zero as is called reference point in this manual It is usually fixed at the maximum stroke point of X axis Y axis or Z axis This origin that is a fixed point is set after the machine is designed manufactured and adjusted As the machine zero is not confirmed by the CNC system at power on the auto or manual machine zero return is usually performed The machine zero return has two types one revolution signal non one revolution signal It is set by bit parameter No 6 6 For the zero return of the non one revolution signal by the motor it is classified for the A B two types It is set by bit parameter No 6 7 feo rebun hype using stepper motor wath no encoder vA Iachine zero retum directon sent to the deceleration zero interface i Explanat
245. oning M29 S1000 Rigid mode specified G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restriction F Alarm is issued if the F value specified exceeds the upper limit of the cutting feedrate S Alarm is issued if the rotation speed exceeds the max speed of the gear used which is set by number parameter P294 297 Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset Before canned cycle the tool radius compensation is cancelled automatically while it is set up automatically after the canned cycle Program restart It is ineffective during the rigid tapping 4 4 21 Canned cycle cancel G80 Format G80 Function Itis used to cancel the canned cycle Explanation All canned cycles are cancelled for normal operation Point R and point Z are cancelled too Other drilling and boring data are also cancelled Example 108 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to Reference point and cancel c
246. opment design and the manufacture of machine CNC system CNC device drive unit and servo motor in recent 10 years Now it has developed into a large high tech enterprise integrated with research education industry and trade by enhancing the popularization and trade of CNC machine tools There are more than 1400 staffs in this company that involves 4 doctors more than 50 graduate students and 500 engineers and more than 50 among them are qualified with senior technical post titles The high performance cost ratio products of GSK are popularized in China and Southeast Asia And the market occupation of GSK s product dominates first and the turnout and sale ranks the top in internal industry for successive 7 years from the year 2000 to 2006 which makes it the largest CNC manufacture base throughout China The main products provided by our company includes the NC equipments and devices such as GSK series turning machine milling machine machining center CNC system DA98 DA98A DA98B DA98D series full digital stepper motor drive device DY3 series compound stepper driver device DF3 series response stepper motor driver device GSK SJT series AC servo motors CT L NC slider and so on The current national standard and international standard industry standard as well as the enterprise standard or enterprise internal standard as a supplementary are completely implemented in our production process The capability of abundant technology developme
247. or 4 1 11 for 8 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 039 Evo EVR TLC TLC 1 Tool length compensation type B 0 Tool length compensation type A EVR 1 Offset changed effective by respecifying D in tool radius offset 0 Offset changed effective in next block in tool radius offset EVO 1 Offset changed effective by respecifying H in tool length compensation 0 Offset changed effective in next block in tool length compensation Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 04 0 ODI CCN SUP SUP 1 Start up type in tool radius compensation B 0 Start up type in tool radius compensation A CCN 1 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and cancel compensation in tool radius compensation 0 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and reserve compensation in tool radius compensation ODI 1 Tool radius compensation value set by diameter 0 Tool radius compensation value set by radius Standard setting 1000 0101 System parameter number 04 1 cn1 G39 OM OIM 1 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change enabled 0 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change disabled G39 1 Corner rounding effective in radius compensation 0 Corner rounding ineffective in radius compensation CN1 1 Interference check enabled in radius com
248. or G04 X_ Dwell exact stop ee G10L_ Programmable data input i G15 Polar coordinate instruction cancel G16 Polar coordinate instruction are CGaSR P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G40 4 G17 Write in with other program in block XY plane selection G18 02 used for circular interpolation and tool ZX plane selection G19 radius compensation YZ plane selection G20 Specified by a single block at the Inch input program EAR before the coordinate system set G28 28 ear ear G39 G39 J J JK_orG39 Tool radius compensation cancel Left hand tool radius compensation G40 Tool radius compensation cancel G41 Left hand tool radius compensation YZ Right hand tool radius compensation 43 Positive tool length compensation G44 Z Negative tool length compensation 51 G42 Q O jef s i G49 G49 Tool length compensation cancel 12 G Scaling cancel SE Machine coordinate system G53 Write into the program l selection Workpiece coordinate system 1 G56 05 Write into the block with other program G57 usually placed at the program beginning G59 Geo oo G60 X_ Y Z F_ Unidirectional position G61 G61 Exact stop mode G62 Pr G62 Automatic corner override G63 G63 Tapping mode G64 G64 Cutting mode ees 00 GOSH PHIGHREk O Macro program instruction G76 G76XYZRPFK G80 Write into the block with other program G81 G81 X_Y ZR F_ Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle
249. ordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate G84 G98 684 G99 Initial level Spindle CW f P Paint R Point R level Point Z spindle CCW spindle CCW _92 CGSB m HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle CW when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle is rotated reversely for retraction This operation creates threads Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the return operation is finished Before specifying G84 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CW rotation is not specified it will be adjusted for CW rotation automatically in R level by the current spindle specification If G84 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it cant be stored as a modal datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is e
250. ower is on 5 Don t perform the resetting during the program execution from block research at restarting to restarting or the restarting must be done from the first step 10 2 Program management 10 2 1 Program directory search PROGRAH Press key then press DIR soft key to enter the program directory page See Fig 10 2 1 sI CGSB I HISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 000002 N0120 SYS Version Deposit signal Prog am signal 2006 11 12 ITN 2006 11 12 000151 2006 11 12 000084 2006 11 12 2006 11 12 Dir 2006 11 12 A S0000 T0100 EDIT PRG MDI LCUR MOD JLCUR NXTI DIR Fig 10 2 1 1 Open the program Open the program specified O sequence number ENTER key or EOB key or sequence number ENTER key or EOB key In Edit mode if the sequence number input does not exist a new program will be created 2 Deletion of the program 1 Edit mode Press DEL key to delete the program where cursor locates 2 Edit mode O sequence number DEL or sequence number DEL 10 2 2 Number of the program stored The maximum number of the programs stored in this system is 400 Look up in Fig 10 2 1 above for the message on the number of the program currently stored in the program directory page 10 2 3 Memory capacity Look up in Fig 10 2 1 above for the message on memory capacity in the program directory page 10 2 4 Viewing of the program list A program directory page can display 10 CNC program
251. part figure workpiece quantity I By part base point IL When part is fixed on jig Reference position Workpiece basic point Jig Fixed distance To align the tool center to the Because the tool center can t be workpiece base point specify the located at the workpiece base point locate workpiece coordinate system by CNC the tool to a position or reference point instructions at this position and the that has a distance to the base point set workpiece coordinate system coincides the workpiece coordinate system by this with the programming coordinate system distance e g G92 Workpiece coordinate system should be set for each processing program to select a workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system set can be changed by moving its origin There are two methods to set the workpiece coordinate system 1 By G92 see 4 2 11 for details 2 By Gcode from 54 to 59 see 4 2 8 for details 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming There are absolute and relative definitions to define the axis moving The absolute definition is the method of programming by the axis moving final point which is called absolute programming The relative definition is the method of programming by the axis moving which is called incremental programming 1 Absolute coordinate It is the target position coordinate in the specified workpiece coordinate system namely the position the tool to move to aoe CGSB
252. pecified in a block 4 Ifthe inserted chamfering or corner rounding block causes the tool to go beyond the original interpolation move range alarm is issued 5 Ina block that comes after the coordinate system is changed or a reference point return is specified neither the chamfering nor corner rounding can be specified 6 Corner rounding can t be specified in a threading block 7 Optional angle chamfering or corner rounding can t be used in DNC operation 8 The chamfering and corner rounding value can t be negative or alarm is issued 65 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 3 Reference point G code The reference point is a fixed point on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference point return function There are 3 instructions for reference point as is shown in Fig 4 3 1 1 the tool can be automatically moved to the reference point via an intermediate point along an axis specified by G28 or from the reference point automatically to a specified point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G29 3 R Reference position 2 B intermediate point A return to the start point a C return to target point trom of reference position reference position Fig 4 3 1 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 Format G28 X Y Z Function Itis used for the operation to return to the reference point a special point on machine via an intermediate poin
253. pensation 271 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Interference check disabled in radius compensation Standard setting 0110 0000 System parameter number 0 4 2 M5B M5T RD2 RD1 EXC FXY FXY 1 Axis for drilling canned cycle is the axis selected by program 0 Axis for drilling canned cycle is Z EXC 1 To specify external action by G81 0 To specify drilling canned cycle by G81 RD1 1 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 positive 0 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 negative RD2 1 To set the retraction axis of G 6 G87 X 0 To set the retraction axis of G 6 G87 Y M5T 1 To output MO5 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in tapping cycle 0 Not to output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in tapping cycle M5B 1 To output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in drilling cycle 0 Not to output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in drilling cycle Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 3 OZA SIJ SIJ 1 Displacement in canned cycle specified by I J K 0 Displacement in canned cycle specified by Q OZA 1 To make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling cycle G73 G83 0 Not to make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling cycle G73 G83 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 4 FHD PCP Dov VGR G84 G84 1 Use M codes in rigid tapping
254. plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom _ 82 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 6 To make linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 7 To make circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G35 instruction G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G35 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 F800 Canned cycle starts and go down to the bottom to perform the rectangular groove fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 6 Rectangle outside fine milling cycle G35 G36 Format _ 83 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G37 G98 G99 Xx Y Z R_L J L VU D_ F_ K_ G38 Function They are used for fine milling outside a rectangle by the width and direction specified and the tool returns after fine milling Explanation G37 CCW rectangle outside fine milling cycle G38 CW rectangle outside fine milling cycle l Rectangular width in X axis ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm J Rectangular width in Y a
255. pporting us in the use of GSK s products CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Warning and precautions Warning note and explanation This manual contains the precautions to protect user and machine The precautions are classified as warning and note by safety and supplementary information is regarded as explanation Read the warnings notes and explanations carefully before operation Warning Personnel may be hurted or equipment be damaged if operations and steps are not observed Note Equipment may be damaged if operation instructions or steps are not observed by user Explanation It is used for the supplementary information except for warning and note Copy right is reserved CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL CONTENT l GENERALIZATION soninn 12 H PROGRAMMING gsc cvcsseccecpcencecaceccccacsctcassensesannccsscnaancetencsesessssecesscetaceasaceseceesanscaetenaansseesenenssuensecsaeass 14 TOGENE ia E E E 15 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation eeeeeesssssssssesesseerreressssssssses 15 1 2 Feed Feed function cccccccssssccccesssscceccesssseeeeceseseeeecesssseeeseeessaeeeceesssaeeeeeesssaeeeeeeens 16 1 3 Cutting feedrate spindle speed function eeseeeesssssessrrrrsssseserrrssssserrrrrrsssssrrrreerssssrrreeeesssee 17 1 4 Operation instruction miscellaneOuSs function eeeeeesssssssseereerrrrrssssss
256. rameter setting unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min 256 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL If INI is set for 1 in inch input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min 1 Bit parameter System parameter number ISO 1 ISO code 0 ElAcode INI 1 Inch input 0 Metric input SEQ 1 Automatic sequence number insertion 0 Not automatic sequence number insertion If INI is set for 0 in metric input the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INI is set for 1 in inch input the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min Standard setting 0010 0010 System parameter number 001 SJZ MIRz MIRy MIRx SPT SPT 1 Spindle control type I O point control 0 Spindle control type frequency conversion or others MIRx 1 Mirror setting of X axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of X axis mirror OFF MIRy 1 Mirror setting of Y axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of Y axis mirror OFF MIRz 1 Mirror setting of Z axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of Z axis mirror OFF SJZ 1 Reference point memorizing yes 0 Reference point memorizing no Standard setting 1011 1000 System parameter number 0 02 IOP ASI1 SB1 ASIO SBO SBO 1 Stop bits of communication channel 0
257. rate override classified for 16 gears 0 150 is available in JOG feed by pressing or key for selection Note 1 There is an error of 3 for the overrides 215 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The traverse speed can be selected by pressing Josiah an zi keys in manual rapid traverse The override for rapid traverse includes four gears FO 25 50 100 25 50 100 overrides are set by parameters No 088 092 FO override by number parameter No 093 Note 2 The rapid overrides are effective for the following speed 1 GOO rapid traverse 2 Rapid traverse in canned cycle 3 Rapid traverse in G28 4 Manual rapid traverse Example If the rapid traverse speed is 6m min and override is 50 speed is 3m min Note 3 The adjusting by override keys during the axis moving is ineffective 4 1 4 Manual intervention While a program run in Auto MDI or DNC modes shifts to JOG mode after a dwell operation the manual operation is available Move the axes manually then shift to Auto mode press F key to run the program the axes traverse to the original intervention point by G00 and go on the program execution Explanation 1 If the single block is executed during the returning the tool will stop at a halt position When the cycle start is put on the running is restored 2 If alarm or resetting occurs during the manual intervention or returning this function will be cancelled 3 Don t use
258. raverse to the initial point The hole machining can be performed in Z axis if positioned in XY plane It defines that a canned cycle operation is determined by 3 types They are all specified by G code 1 Data type G90 absolute mode G91 incremental mode 2 Return point plane G98 initial level G99 R level 3 Hole machining type G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 Initial level and R level Initial level It is the absolute position where the tool locates in Z axis before the canned cycle R level It is also called safe plane it is a position in Z axis when the traverse is switched to the feeding in canned cycle which is usually positioned at a distance from the workpiece surface to prevent the tool from colliding with the workpiece and provide a sufficient distance to finish the acceleration The instructions of G73 G74 G 76 G81 G89 specify all the data hole location data hole machining data repetition by which a block is constituted 70 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The format for hole machining is shown as following CG173 G A T 2 R I P F kK Ox ee Hole machining data Hole position data Hole machining type Therein the significance of the hole location data and machining data is as following Table 4 4 1 Table 4 4 1 Hole Refer to Table 4 4 3 note the restrictions above Parameter Designation Explanation word machining G Data for hole The hole location is specifie
259. re manual reference point return must be performed after power on zero return in _ 49 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL manual mode or auto reference point return must be specified by G28 If an absolute position encoder is used this operation is unneeded 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 Format G92X Y Z Function It is used to set floating workpiece coordinate system The current tool absolute coordinate values in the new workpiece coordinate system are specified by 3 instruction parameters And this instruction doesn t result in the axis movement Explanation G92 floating coordinate system 7 a Machine zero 7 Machine coordinate origin Fig 4 2 11 1 1 As the figure shows the origin of the G92 floating coordinate system is the value in machine coordinate system which is irrelevant to the workpiece coordinate system it can be set up after the machine zero return G92 setting is effective in the following conditions 1 Before system power off 2 Before workpiece coordinate system is called 3 Before machine zero return The G92 floating coordinate system is usually used for the alignment of temporary workpiece machining and it will be lost after the power is off And G92 is usually used at the program beginning or specified in MDI mode before the program auto run 2 There are two methods for defining the floating coordinate system 1 By tool nose _ 50 CGSB
260. rectly generated If this code is specified in a circular instruction correct motion will not be obtained Refer to 5 for offset direction change by tool radius compensation G G41 G42 Linear linear G47 mode A block specified by G4 pt wa a a gE ee Tool center path 5 Intersection Circular linear 130 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL A block specified by G42 c LA gt Intersection Programmed path 8 Instruction for cancelling the offset vector temporarily In offset mode if G92 absolute programming is specified the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and then the offset vector is restored automatically In this case different from the offset cancel mode the tool moves directly from the intersection to the specified point where the offset vector is cancelled Also when offset mode is restored the tool moves directly to the intersection Tool center 2 mn Intersection Intersection Fa Pa t i AF G4 MS G91003000 7000 M6 3000Y6000 MY 69210002000 Me GOTA40007 S000 H5 H Hs X Programmed path 692 block N 9 A block without tool movement The following blocks have no tool movement In these blocks the tool will not move even if tool radius compensation is effective ONOS S ar M code output oA a E S code output 3 G04 X10000 Dwell 4 G17 Z100 ee Move instruction
261. rressressrressresseresseressrressres 155 5 1 14 Auto tool change start and end M50 M51 sessessssesssssesessssssssssresssrresseresssrresssrressen 155 5 1 15 Tool judging after tool change M53 ccccccccccccssccessccessecessecesseecsseeeessecessecesseeesseeeesees 156 5 2 M codes used by programM eesessssssssssesserrrrrrrssssssssssesrrerereressssssssssserrrrreereeessssssssserrrerees 156 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 M02 oe ccccccccscccsssccessseccesseeeesseecesseeeessseeeeseeeens 156 S22 Por e MOOI a E EEE E EE E E EEEE 156 5 2 3 Program optional stop CMO c cccccccccccscccssccesssccsssecessceessecessecesseeceseecessecessecesseeesseeeesees 156 524 Subprogram Callin MISI sesaosan nino ai nn EE EEEE AAEE 156 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 aessesssesssssssersssesssisssessssssesssrsssrsssrssrssrissersseesseesseesseesneess 156 6 S codes for Spindle Function cccccccssssccccccsssscccccscsssscsssssssscssssssscsccccesssssssssssssscesscscccccees 158 OT Pde ana OT COMMUN eeraa E E A E E EEE 158 6 2 Spindle switch volume control eeeeeeeseseessesssssssesereerrrrssssssssssrrrrreereersrsssssssserrereeeeeeeesessseseee 158 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 oo cccccccceessssceceeessseeeceeesssseeeeeessseeeeeeens 159 l Feed Functions F COG ois sesicci cas cocsencstesntsescavssatataeicavacsosessasanssaoansossatassestens cass CASIER A ANKARAS EA anai 162 TM E E E e E E AOE A OE EAA E E A A E E E E E A 162
262. rs 0 Synch error in rigid tapping SSOG 1 For servo spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping 0 For following spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping ORI 1 To perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts 0 Not perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 047 SCR XSC SCLz SCLy SCLx R1N RIN 1 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by G90 G91 instruction 0 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by absolute instruction SCLx 1 X axis scaling effective 0 X axis scaling ineffective SCLy 1 Y axis scaling effective 273 CGSB I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Y axis scaling ineffective SCLz 1 Z axis scaling effective 0 Z axis scaling ineffective XSC 1 Each axis scaling mirror effective 0 Each axis scaling mirror ineffective SCR 1 Scaling override unit 0 001 0 Scaling override unit 0 0001 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number O48 PD1 MDL MDL 1 G codes of unidirectional positioning set for modal 0 Gcodes of unidirectional positioning not set for modal PD1 1 To perform in position check for unidirectional positioning 0 Not perform in position check for unidirectional positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 0 IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DOP
263. ruction 3 G54 workpiece coordinate system 1 is selected automatically by system after machine zero return at power on The absolute position on displayer is the coordinate set in G54 coordinate system G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 4 When different workpiece coordinate system is called by block the axis for move by instruction will be located in the new workpiece coordinate system for the coordinate of the axis not move it turns to the corresponding coordinate in the new workpiece coordinate system and the actual machine position doesn t alter _ 46 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL e g The corresponding machine coordinate for G54 coordinate system origin is 10 10 10 The corresponding machine coordinate for G55 coordinate system origin is 30 30 30 When the program is executed by sequence the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate of the end point are shown as follows Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate GO G54 X50 Y50 Z50 50 50 50 60 60 60 130 60 G55 X100 Y100 100 X120 Z80 100 70 130 120 100 80 150 130 110 5 The external workpiece zero offset or workpiece zero offset can be
264. s correspond to the machine operator panel keys to the right of the displayer by the key s up right letter signs one by one The corresponding indicator on the machine panel and the up left indicator of the soft panel light up if a soft key is selected which is consistent with the key operation on the machine panel The soft key operations are set by bit parameters No 57 0 No 57 5 No 57 6 No 57 7 3 5 5 Servo page 1 Press SERVO soft key to enter this page it is shown as following See Fig 3 5 5 197 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 000002 N00120 Y AXIS Z AXIS 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SETTING SERVO X AXIS 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 PROPORTION INTEGRAL DIERENTIAL FEEDBACK SET PERIOD FIL TER FEED DIRECT CMR FEEDGEARN M REF COUNTER DATA 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SO0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 T0010 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 5 In this page servo transmission parameters can be modified but user needs to get a well know about these parameters to avoid machine damage or hurt to personnel 3 5 6 Backup restore and transfer of the data In lt SETTING gt mode the 2 page press DATA soft key to enter data page The user data such as mode parameter number parameter tool paramet
265. s following 1 Circular instruction 5 reverse rotation 2 Tool radius compensation C reverse offset 3 Coordinate system rotation reverse rotation angle 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 A programmed shape can be rotated When a workpiece comprises some identical shapes this function can be used for programming by prepairing a subprogram for the shape unit then 58 CGSB m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL calling it by rotation function Format G17 G68 X_Y_R_ or G18G68X_ Z R or G19G68Y ZR G69 Function G68 is used for the programming shape in plane rotating by a center point specified as an origin G69 is used for cancellation of coordinate system rotation Angle of rotation Center of rotation Explanation 1 G68 is an optional parameter with 2 positioning parameters that are used for specifying the rotation center If the rotation center is not specified the tool current position is regarded as the center by system The positioning parameters are relevant to the current coordinate plane while X Y for G17 Z X for G18 Y Z for G19 2 Whether the current positioning mode is absolute or incremental the rotation center can only be specified by absolute positioning of Cartesian coordinate system G68 can be followed by a command parameter R the value of the parameter is the angle to be rotated The positive value is for CCW rotation an
266. s the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate P Dwell time K Number of repeats G82 G98 G82 G99 Li ey Point R level Point R Point R i Point Z 5 Point Z 4 After positioning along X and Z axes the tool traverses to point R level to perform the drilling from point R level to point Z level then dwells and returns rapidly after the tool reaches the hole bottom The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G82 is specified If G82 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is effective if P 89 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL value is more than t
267. sed to specify the scaling center of G51 If they are not specified the tool current position will be specified for the scaling center Whether the positioning mode is absolute or incremental the scaling center is specified by the absolute positioning mode Moreover in polar coordinate system G16 mode the parameters in G51 are expressed by Cartesian coordinate system Example G17 G91 G54 GO X10 Y10 G51 X40 Y40 P2 Though in incremental mode the scaling center means the absolute coordinate 40 40 in G54 coordinate system G1 Y90 By incremental mode as for parameter Y 2 Scaling whether the current mode is G90 or G91 the scaling are always expressed by absolute mode Except specified in program the scaling can also be specified in parameters The number parameters P331 335 correspond to the scaling ratios of X Y Z A and 5 respectively If no scaling is specified the number parameter P330 can be used for scaling setting If the parameter P or J K value specified are negative the mirror image is made for the corresponding axis 3 Scaling setting The effectiveness of the single axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47 8 55 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL the effectiveness of the axis scaling mirror image is set by bit parameter NO 47 6 and the ratio unit of it is set by bit parameter NO 47 7 4 Scaling cancellation After the scaling is cancelled by G50 followed by a moving in
268. seeeeeeeees 151 5 Miscellaneous Function M code scsssssessasccsansssccansssascecoanasceanatacdnassosnicecedastsonsssssuesssoussanssacctesstonseats 153 ST Mcodes controled Dy PLO sessur e eE E 154 5 1 1 Forward and reverse rotation instructions M03 M04 aessssssssssssssssssssssssrrsnsssrrress 154 Dele SPee GOP MUS Jesa E EEE EE E NERE 155 5 1 3 Cooling on and off M08 M09 esssssssssssssssssssrssssesssresssrssserssnresssrssneessoresserssseessnes 155 5 1 4 A axis release and clamping M10 M11 e asssssssssssssesssssssrsssseesssrresssrresseresssrresssrressen 155 5 1 5 Tool release and clamping M16 M17 eesssssssssesssssesesssssessssresssreesssreesseressseresssrresssn 155 510 Spadki oncion MIO seega N SEE EEA RRA ERES 155 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 ssssssssssssesssssseresssssonsssserosssserrssserrsssrrrrsssrrrss 155 5 1 8 Magazine rotation instruction M23 M24 ses ssesssssesessseresssserssssressereesserressrresssrressen 155 5 19 Rigid tapping M29 ssssaissusesacssacesnsvsedstasssnimansssanssessicinsasnnaiaecvaisetasoaviecmsmednaviesnenes 155 5 1 10 Lubricating on and off M32 M33 iciccccccccccsccessccessccessecesseeesseeeessecessecesseeessecessees 155 5 1 11 Helical chip remover on and off M35 M36 wicccccceccssscccesssecceessseeeeesseeeeessseeeeenaes 155 5 1 12 Mirror image instructions M40 M41 M42 M43 eeesssssssssseseessererssrresssrressen 155 5 1 13 Spindle blowing on and off M44 M45 eessssssesssesrsserisseress
269. set interval and offset override Note Refer to the 4 part INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION of GSK218M PLC USAGE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION MANAUL for the pitch setting 3 5 Setting display 3 5 1 Setting page 1 Entry of page SET Pressing key to enter the SETTING page there are SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO DATA PSD sub modes in this page They can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys the pages are shown as following see Fig 3 5 1 193 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL SETTING 000002 N0120 MIRROR X 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Y 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Z 0 OFF 1 ON CODE z 0 EIA 1 ISO IN UNIT O MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 3 CHANNEL NO ABS PRG C0 ABS 1 INC AUTO SEQ 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ STOP 0000 PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP 0000 SEQUENCE NO 2006 Y 11 M 14 D 14 H 26 M 45 S DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 JK PANEL SERVOIE gt Fig 3 5 1 0 0 0 0 2 SETTING explanation Press SETTING soft key to enter the page shown as Fig 3 5 1 After entering the page the user can view and modify the parameters The operation steps are as following a Enter lt MDI gt mode Cb Move the cursor to the items to be altered by pressing cursor keys Cc Key in 1 or 0 by following steps 1 2 3 4 X Y Z axis mirror image 1 Mirror image on 0 Mirror image off ISO code When
270. sing reset key Not clear DNC running program display by pressing reset key To display program list by program numbers To display program list by logging time Mode displayed on program monitoring page Mode not displayed on program monitoring page Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 024 SVS SPS SGD NPA RHD RHD NPA SGD SPS SVS To display servo setting page Not display servo setting page To display spindle setting page Not display spindle setting page To display servo wave Not display servo wave To switch to alarm page when alarm occurs Not switch to alarm page when alarm occurs To update the relative position display at MPG interruption Not update the relative position display at MPG interruption Standard setting 0000 0000 265 Cie I HISE GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL System parameter number 0 2 5 ALM DGN GRA SET OFT PAR PRG POS POS 1 To switchover page by repressing POSITION key in position page 0 Not switchover page by repressing POSITION key in position page PRG 1 To switchover page by repressing PROGRAM key in program page 0 Not switchover page by repressing PROGRAM key in program page PAR 1 To switchover page by repressing PARAMETER key in parameter page 0 Not switchover page by repressing PARAMETER key in parameter page OFT 1 To switchover page by repressing
271. specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Aug 2007 Printing 2
272. specified immediately after G28 instruction 3 The optional parameters X Y and Z in G29 instruction are used for specifying the target point i e point C in Fig 4 3 1 1 from the reference point which can be expressed by absolute or incremental instruction The instruction specifies the incremental value from the intermediate point in incremental programming If an axis is not specified it means the axis has no moving relative to the intermediate point The G29 instruction followed by an axis is a single axis return with no action taken by other axes 68 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Example 1 G90 GO X10 Y10 G91 G28 X20 Y20 Reference point return via the intermediate point 30 30 G29 X30 Return to 60 30 from the reference point via the intermediate point 30 30 Note The component in X axis should be 60 in incremental programming The intermediate point of G29 instruction is assigned by G28 Refer to G28 explanation for the definition criterion and system default of the intermediate point 4 3 4 Reference point return check G27 Format G27 X_Y_Z_ Function It is used for the reference point return check the reference point is specified by X_Y_Z_ absolute incremental instruction Explanation 1 G27 instruction positions the tool at a traverse speed If the tool reaches the reference point the reference point return indicator lights up However if the position reached by the tool is
273. speed F xoverride in G00 mode the axes speeds are set by number parameter No 088 093 and they can be overriden by rapid override the dry run speed is set by number parameter No 086 Note 3 The programming speed for feed per revolution is displayed when the block involving feed per revolution is being executed 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and mediating The steps of relative coordinate position clearing are as follows 1 Enter a mode that displays the relative coordinate Fig 3 1 2 GANEL 2 Clearing operation Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers then press key the relative coordinate in X axis will be cleared Fig 3 1 5 3 Mediating operation Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers then press ENTER key and the relative coordinate in X axis will be mediated The relative coordinate of the axis divided by 2 74 4 Coordinate setting Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers input the setting ENTER data and press key and the data will be entered into the coordinate system ACT POS RELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 NO00060 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 96 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 OO 10 06 00 Sx 100 S0000 T0100 MDI REL ABS LALLY MONI Fig 3 1 6 184 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AN
274. sseerrrrreeeerrssssssssee 17 1 5 Tool selection for various machining Tool FUNCTION ccc cccceeesssceeeeeceeessssseeeeeees 18 1 6 Tool figure and tool motion DY PrOGrAM ccccceceessscccccceesssssceeeccceeessssseeeeeceeeesstseeeeeees 18 LGI POollenie Comp eis at Oi si c 2covssaaceencatactionenteacnatantsinetastennaiainedanthabeaaainitonuashatessdiwyestaceuw ents 18 LO TOO Facies compensa Oeser cenieni nN EEEE EES 19 1 7 Tool movement range stroke ccccccccccccccccccceessessssssssncceeeeesecccceeeeesessessessaeeeeeeececeeeees 19 Z Part Program Composition sivisisscescevessdeccssinsassccuedauenivessessuedescadhesesecsvecestceubesevdceseeeccssissavsseteressesesececeves 20 Ze Programi COmMpOSION serieren a e aE E EE EEEE NTETE 20 DM PO AVIS a a E netedeesna tuatontc uesienta seisarecamtenaconicanaees 20 212 Seguen co HUMID CE and IOC I esee reen e E EEOSE EE s 21 PaWod MWSUMICEION W OU cease ess sesaenseecsscess E E A A sauces EA 21 2 2 COMMON structure of a program cee eeceeeeccccccccessssssceeecccecessssseeeececeeeesssseeeeeceeeeetstsseeeeeeeeeens 22 Zal SOPOTA d e dctaabanemsuavsu sean ewes 23 Died 2 SU PEO T AU CAM e E E I N 24 De PO E E A 25 3 Programming Fundamentals sscicssscccsccsesesicsiccssisivccavisiencesecsssessecsanvsnesssesnsicdeesesncsneosviaianssvecsaasavacenies 26 31 C ntroled AXIS vc cccscoconssessevonteavsnsdesiivessdnsndecedenseanntesstnaotestinendeuntessdestteeedisndne
275. stem G21 input by metric system Function They are used for the inch metric conversion in program Explanation 1 This function must be specified by a single block at the beginning of the program before the coordinate system setup 2 Change the unit of the following item after the inch metric conversion Feedrate specified by F code Position instruction Workpiece zero offset value 63 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Tool compensation value Scale unit of MPG Moving distance in incremental feeding Some parameters The G code status at power on is the same as that in power off Note 1 Inch metric conversion can t be executed during the program execution 2 The tool compensation value must be preset by the minimum incremental input unit when inch system is converted to metric system or the reverse 3 For the 1 G28 instruction the running from the intermediate point is the same as the JOG reference point return when inch system is converted to metric system or the reverse 4 When the minimum incremental input unit is different from the minimum command unit the maximum error that is not accumulated is the half of the minimum command unit 5 The inch metric conversion can be set by bit parameter NO 00 2 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner rounding Format L_ chamfering R_ corner rounding Function When the above instruction is added to the end of a block that specifies linear interpolati
276. stem PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Before specifying G89 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G89 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z Ror any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G89 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to poin
277. stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 5 c01 1 0 C02 1 0 c03 1 0 C04 1 0 c05 1 0 C06 1 co7 coe cos co4 co3 coz coi To clear G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop To clear G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop To clear G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop To clear G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop To clear G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop To clear G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop 269 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 To reserve G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop C07 1 To clear G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 03 6 c15 c14 c13 C12 c11 C10 co9 Cos C08 1 To clear G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop C09 1 To clear G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G cod
278. struction if the coordinate rotation is cancelled by default the current tool position is regarded as the start point of this moving instruction 5 In scaling mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can t be specified If needed they should be specified after the scaling is cancelled 6 Even different scalings are specified for circular interpolation and axes the ellipse path cann t be made by tool If the scaling ratios of the axes are different and the circular interpolation are programmed by R the interpolation figure is shown as Fig 4 2 14 2 below the scaling ratio of X is 2 that of Y is 1 690 G00 X0 0 100 0 G51 X0 0 Y0 0 70 0 12000 J1000 G02 100 0 Y0 0 R100 0 F500 Above instructions are equivalent to the following instruction G90 G00 X0_0 100 0 70 0 GO X200 0 Y0 0 R200 0 F500 Magnification of radius R depends on or J whichever ts larger Y Scaled shape 0 0 100 0 200 0 Fig 4 2 14 2 Scaling of circular interpolation 1 If the axes scaling ratio are different and the circular interpolation is programmed by I J K the interpolation figure is shown as Fig 4 2 14 3 in following example X scaling ratio is 2 Y scaling ratio is 1 56 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 690 GOO X0 0 Y0 0 G51 X0 0 Y0 0 12000 J1000 G02 X100 0 Y0 0 10 0 J 100 0 F500 Above instru
279. t Explanation Intermediate point An intermediate point is specified by an instruction parameter in G28 which can be expressed by absolute or incremental instructions During the execution of this block the coordinate value of the intermediate point of the axis specified is stored that is to be used for the G29 returning from the reference point instruction Note The coordinate value of the intermediate point is stored in the CNC system Only the axis coordinate value specified by G28 is stored each time for the other axes not specified by G28 the coordinate values specified by G28 before are used If the intermediate point defaulted by the system is not ensured by user when using G28 instruction it is better to specify all the axes Take a consideration by N5 block in the following example 1 66 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL A R reference positions Fig 4 3 1 1 1 The action of the G28 block can be analyzed as following refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point of the specified axis from the current position point A point B at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to the reference point from the intermediate point point B point R at a traverse speed 2 G28 is anon modal instruction which is only effective in current block 3 The combined reference point return of a single axis or multiple axes is available in this system And the intermedia
280. t R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to Reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group GO0 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 19 Right handed rigid tapping G84 Format G84X Y ZRPFK Function In rigid tapping the spindle is controlled by a servo motor that can perform the high speed and high precision tapping and it can ensure the tapping initial level without changing point R level l e If a tapping instruction is repeated for many times at the same position the 104 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL thread shape will not be damaged Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 684 698 684 699 spindle stop Spindle stop 2o initial level a Operation operations To Operation pan Spindle CCW Spindle stop spindle crc Spindle CCW Be y P stop
281. tart or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 t Linear circular Linear linear Start position Start position 742 Programmed path Programmed path L Tool center path Tool center path Y Linear Circular Start position Linear Linear Start position 3 r offset value t offset value Workpiece i Tool center path Tool center path Programmed path d Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 linear linear t offset value Tool center path 3E Programmed path ee ne G41 Less than 1 deg Start position 2 Tool movement in offset mode Alarm occurs and tool stops if the offset plane is changed during the offset The tool movement in offset mode is as following figures 123 CGSB P HISKFS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2 180 il Linear Circular 1 Lin ar Linear Workpiece Programmed path ill Cincular Linear Work piece Programmed path l _ f Hien Tool center path Fh i Frogrammed path b Tool center path a 3 Special condition 1 Mo intersection Alarm occurs and the tool stops When the tool compensation value is large va When the tool compensa tion Value is small Center of the arc B a Center of the arc A Programmed path Forthe figure above f the tool radius is smal
282. tated clockwise Boring is performed in the positive direction along Z axis until point Z is reached At 100 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL point Z the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position after it is oriented again And the tool is retracted to the initial level in the opposite direction of the tool tip and then is shifted in the direction of the tool tip And the spindle is rotated clockwise to proceed to the next block operation The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance and the retraction direction is set by system parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 Q must be a positive value if Q is specified with a negative value the sign is ignored The hole bottom offset of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which should be specified carefully as it is also used for the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G87 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G87 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring Ina block that does not contain
283. te point coordinate is saved by system during the workpiece coordinate system change Example 1 N1 G90 G54 X0 Y10 N2 G28 X40 Setthe intermediate point of X axis for X40 in G54 workpiece coordinate system and return to reference point via point 40 10 i e reference point return of single X axis N3 G29 X30 Return to the point 30 10 via point 40 10 from reference point i e target point return of single X axis N4 G01 X20 N5 G28 Y6O Intermediate point X40 Y60 which is substituted by X40 specified by G28 before due to it is not specified in X axis Note The intermediate point is not 20 60 N6 G55 Due to workpiece coordinate system change the intermediate point 40 60 in G54 workpiece coordinate system is changed for 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system N7 G29 X60 Y20 Return to the point 60 20 via the intermediate point 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system from reference point The G28 instruction can automatically cancel the tool compensation and this instruction is 67 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL only used in automatic tool change mode changing tool at the reference point after reference point return So the tool radius compensation and tool length compensation should be cancelled before using this instruction See the 1 reference point setting in number parameter P45 P49 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 There are 4 referen
284. te the spindle If G76 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G76 X300 Y 250 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Z 150 R 100 Q5 Orient at the hole bottom then shift by 5mm P1000 F120 Stop at the hole bottom for 1s _ 96 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cy
285. the handwheel rotated should be less than 5 r s If not there may be inconsistent between the scale and the moving amount 6 2 Control in MPG interruption 6 2 1 MPG interruption operation MPG interruption operation can be overlapped with the automatic movement in Auto mode 223 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Teel position during _ aulomalic operation Tod positon afer handle anteruption Programmed depih of cut i ae Depth of cut by handle interrupbeon Operation steps 1 After the dwell of the program execution in Auto mode switch over the control to MPG mode 2 For the tool offset by handwheel move Z axis downward or X Y axis parallel modify the coordinate system 3 After the control is switched to Auto mode the workpiece coordinates remain unchanged till the coordinates restore to their actual values after the machine zero return operation As the program run in Auto MDI DNC mode is shifted to MPG mode by dwell the control will execute the MPG interruption The coordinate system for MPG interruption is shown in Fig 6 2 1 ACTUAL POSITION 000002 N00120 RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHING X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED CREM DIST X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 40000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 500000 T0010 MDI REL CABS ALL MONT Fig 6 2 1 The MPG interr
286. the program page then press RESTART soft key to enter program restart interface Fig 10 1 9 246 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL PROGRAM RESTART 000014 N00012 LOADED MODAL CURRENT MODAL G01 G49 F 3000 G00 G49 300 G17 G80 S 1000 G17 G80 1000 G90 G98 M 03 09 G90 G98 30 G94 G15 T 0003 G94 G15 0003 G54 G50 H 0000 G54 G50 H 0001 G21 G69 D 0001 G21 G69 D 0001 G40 G64 N 20 G40 G64 N 2 DISTANCE ABSOLUTE REM DIST 1 X 54 000 X 54 000 X 0 000 2 Y 12 000 Y 7 800 Y 4 200 3 Z 29 500 Z 29 500 Z 0 000 S00000 T0003 AUTO RSTR RETURN Fig 10 1 9 4 In MDI mode input modes according to the pre loaded modal values in Fig 10 1 9 5 Press the key the control returns to the interruption point by GOO and go on execute the program This execution can be restarted at any place Note 1 The 1 2 3 headed the coordinates in figure is the moving sequence for the axes moving to the program restarting position They are set by parameter P376 2 Check whether the collision occurs when the tool moves to the program restart position if this possibility exists move the tool to the place that has no obstructions and restart 3 When the coordinate axis restart the position moving switch on the single block running the tool stops each time it finishes an axis movement 4 If there is no absolute position detector it must restart the line reference point return of advancing after the p
287. ting range 0 9999 0261 Spindle encoder lines 1024 Setting range O0 100000 0262 Setting range 0 99 9999 0266 Limit with vector ignored when moving along outside corner in tool radius compensation C 298 Spindle override lower limit 0 0000 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Setting range 0 9999 9999 0267 Maximum value of tool wear compensation 400 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0270 Retraction amount of high speed peck drilling cycle 2 0000 G73 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0271 Reserved space amount of canned cycle G83 2 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0272 Spindle speed change ratio in tool retraction without overload torque signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0273 Spindle speed change ratio in tool retraction with overload torque signal received Setting range 0 9999 0000 0274 Cutting feedrate change ratio in tool retraction without overload torque signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0275 Cutting feedrate change ratio in small peck drilling cycle Setting range 0 9999 0000 0276 Macro variable number of retraction actions during output cutting Setting range 0 9999 0000 0277 Macro variable number output of retraction actions due to overload signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0278 Traverse speed back to point R with address not specified Setting range 0 9999 0000 0279 Traverse speed to the hole bottom with address not specified Settin
288. tion ce seesesesseeseeececceeeceeeeeeeaeaasaesenseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 222 CL Explaradon of MPG Teed rseson en E leeressicetociatoanmvesmensoras 223 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 62 COMMON MPG IMSMUD MON pisiinisieisasunssrsinsatcedtintsantuatawadantiebetitawiedtiadusnisiebatcadlbeiisesdiitiamnbeddaatuits 223 6 2 1 MPG interruption Operation ccccccccccccccecccccceceeeeesesseseeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeaaeeasseseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 225 6 2 2 Relation of MPG interruption with other functions 2 0 0 0 cccccsssseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 225 6 3 Auxiliary Control IN MPG Mode 0000 0 ieee ccccccccesssssceecceceeessssseeeececesessssseeececeessstssseeeeeeeeeens 225 7 Auto Operation sseesseessessssoooooooceceeeceeeeeecsoooooooocceececeeeeeecosoooooooceeeeeeeeeeesssoooooooceeeeeeseeeeessoososocoeeeeeeeeee 226 7 1 Selection of the auto run programS ssseeesseeesssssseererrsssssrrrrrsssssrrrererrssserrreersssssrrreeesssssrres 226 TL AWO TUN SUA oE EE E 226 Fae POTU AON r AAE TE EAE TAEAE TEE TOTS 221 7 4 Auto running from an arbitrary blOCK eeseeeeseesesesesserrrssssssrerrrsssssrrrrrrsssserrreersssserrrerrsssssren 228 TEE D a A E p E T E E E E A A A A N AT 229 7 6 Single block running eeessessssssesserresssssssrrrrrsssssrererssssserreressssserrrerssssserrreeesssserreeeeessserrereeessssss 229 7 7 Running with machine lOCK e eeeeeeesssssssessssssserererressssssssssr
289. tion Originally programmed tool path Rotation center Example 2 Scaling and rotation G51 X300 Y150 P0 5 G68 X200 Y100 R45 G01 G90 X400 Y100 G91 Y100 X 200 Y 100 X200 G69 G50 60 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL When scaling and coordinate system rotation are applied When only coordinate Li system rotation is applied When only scaling is applied 200 0 ii Cutting program 100 0 gl 300 0 400 0 Example 3 Repetition of G68 By program main program G92 X0 YO Z20 G69 G17 M3 S1000 GO0Z2 G51 XO YO 11 2 J1 2 G42 D01 offset setting M98 P2100 P02100 subprogram call M98 P2200L calling for 7 times G40 G50 GO G90 220 XOYO M30 Subprogram 2200 02200 G68 X0 YO G91 R45 0 relative rotation angle G90 M98 P2100 subprogram O2200 calling subprogram O2100 M99 Subprogram 02100 02100 G90 GO XO Y 20 Right hand tool compensation setup G01Z 2 F200 X8 284 X14 142 Y 14 142 M99 61 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Programmed path When offset is applied 4 2 16 Skip function G31 Format G31 X_Y Z_ Function The linear interpolation can be specified like G01 after G31 instruction During the execution of G31 the current instruction execution will be interrupted to execute next block if an external skip signal is entered While the working end point is specified not by programming but by signa
290. tion arc 1 from the start point 6 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by arc 2 arc 3 7 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G26 G32 Explanation In outer circle fine milling the interpolation directions of transition arc and fine milling arc are different while the interpolation direction in the instruction means the interpolation direction of the fine milling Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G26 instruction _79 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Initial level z 50 La LTA g G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G26 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J30 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the outer circle fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 Format G33 G98 G99 Xx Y Z RL JIL W Q VU D F K G34 Function These instructions are used for linear cutting cycle from the rectangle center by the parameter data specified till the rectangular groove programmed is machined Explanation For these instructions refer to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling G34 CW rectangular groove rough mill
291. tion value of Z axis The offset number can be specified by HOO H128 as required The value of the offset number can be stored into the offset memory in advance by LCD MDI panel The range of the offset value is as follows minut Offset value H 999 999 999 999m m The offset value corresponding to offset No 00 HOO is 0 It can t be set in the system The tool length compensation is ineffective before Z instruction Note While the offset value is changed due to the offset number changing the old offset value is replaced by the new one not the adding of the new offset value and the old one For example a a cticcivesusssteseven dete offset value 20 HOZ ssa offset value 30 G90 G43 Z100 HO1 _ Z to 120 G90 G43 Z100 H02 Z to 130 112 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 3 Sequence of the offset value Once the length offset mode is set up the current offset number takes effect at once if the offset number is changed the old offset value will be immediately replaced by the new one For example Oxxxxx H01 G43 Z10 1 Offset number H01 takes effect G44 Z20 H02 2 Offset number H02 takes effect H03 3 Offset number HO3 takes effect G49 4 Offset cancel HOO takes effect M30 4 Tool length compensation cancel Specify G49 or HOO to cancel tool length compensation And the tool length compensation is cancelled immediately after they are specified Note A
292. tion with an incremental Instruction If the positioning parameter of the 1 hole cycle after G16 instruction is not specified the tool current position is the default positioning parameter of the hole cycle The 1 canned cycle instruction after the current polar coordinate must be complete or the tool moving will be wrong After G16 instruction except the hole cycle the words of the positioning parameter for tool moving involves with the special plane selection mode While the polar coordinate system is cancelled by G15 which followed by a moving instruction the tool current position is defaulted as the start point of the moving instruction 4 2 14 Scaling in plane G51 G50 Format G51 X_Y_Z_P__ Absolute instruction for scaling center coordinate P axis scaling by a same ratio Scaling processing blocks G50 Scaling cancel or G51X_Y Z_ _J_K_ scaling by different ratios l J K by each axis Scaling processing block eA CGS m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G50 Scaling cancel Function G51 is used for the programming figure scaling in a same or different ratio by a position specified as the center G51 is needed to be specified in a single block and cancelled by G50 Y Pg Scaling center Fig 4 2 14 1 Scaling P1 P2P3P4 P1 P2 P3 P4 Explanation 1 Scaling center G51 can be specified with 3 positioning parameters X_Y_Z_ which are optional These positioning parameters are u
293. tomatic corner override OTOP 1 Use external start and stop 0 Not use external start and stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 6 0 sc sPK Ixc TLF TLF 1 Use tool life management 0 Not use tool life management IXC 1 Use indexing table 0 Not use indexing table SPK 1 Use small peck drilling cycle 0 Not use small peck drilling cycle SCL 1 Use scaling 0 Not use scaling Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 061 FALM LALM EALM SALM SYC ssc SSC 1 To use constant surface speed control 0 Not use constant surface speed control SYC 1 Use synch spindle 0 Not use synch spindle SALM 1 Spindle driver alarm ignored 0 Spindle driver alarm not ignored EALM 1 Emergency stop alarm ignored 0 Emergency stop alarm not ignored LALM 1 Limit alarm ignored 277 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0 Limit alarm not ignored FALM 1 Feed axis driver alarm ignored 0 Feed axis driver alarm not ignored Standard setting 1000 0000 2 Number parameter Parameter number Definition Default value 00000 I O channel input and output device selection Setting range O 2 0001 Baudrate of communication channel 0 38400 Setting range O 115200 unit BPS 0002 Baudrate of communication channel 1 115200 Setting range O 115200 unit
294. troduction in it if you are unfamiliar with the macro instruction operations 6 PLCADDR interface In lt INDEX gt page press PLCADDR soft key to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 9 11 INDEX INFO PLC ADDRESS 000001 N00000 MEANING SYMBOL ADDRESS Feed pause alarm signal SPL FOOO 4 Cycle start alarm signal STL FOOO S Servo ready signal SA FOOO 6 Automatic run signal OP FOOO 7 Alarm signal AL FOO1 0 Reset signal RST FOO1 1 Spindle speed inpos sig F001 3 Spindle enabling signal ENB F001 4 Tapping signal TAP F001 5 Canceling rigid tap sig D TAP F001 6 Inch input signal INCH F002 0 Rapid feedrate signal RPDO F002 1 Ln 1 319 S0000 T0000 EDIT lt PLCADDR CALCULA Fig 3 9 11 The PLC addresses signs meanings are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in it if you are unfamiliar with the PLC addresses 7 CALCULA interface In the 2 page of lt INDEX gt interface press CALCULA soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 9 12 213 CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 000001 N00000 INPUT 50000 T0000 MDI A PLCADDR CALCULA Fig 3 9 12 The operation formats of addition subtraction multiplication division sine cosine extraction are shown in this interface The cursor may be moved to the space for inputting and press lt ENTER gt key for confirmation After the data input is completed the system will ca
295. truction can be used for left hand high speed and high precision tapping Explanation XY Hole positioning data 106 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R P Dwell time F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats G74 G98 GT4 G99 spindle stop Spindle stop a Initial level a perationi yf T R Operation2 Spindle CW Spindle Dan Pa stop Point R Point R level Operation Operations Spindle mE D Fi k pan Operation Spindle p spindle stop CCW CCW After positioning along X and Y axis traverse is performed by Z axis to point R level The spindle is rotated CW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G74 instruction When tapping is finished the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction to retract to point R level and stops And traverse to initial level is then performed When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods 1 Specify M
296. ue that is a coordinate of the end point relative to the start point in G91 The circle center is specified by parameter words I J K corresponding to X Y Z respectively Either in absolute mode G90 or in incremental mode G91 parameter values of J K are coordinates of circle center relative to the arc start point for simplicity the circle center coordinate when taking the start point as origin They are incremental values with signs See Fig 4 2 3 2 End point x y End point 7 x _ End point y z yj EN xl F z x As ers PA Start F point point j i Center Center Center Fig 4 2 3 2 J K are assigned with sign according to the circle center relative to the start point The circle center can also be specified by radius R besides I J K G02 X_Y_R_ G03 X_Y_R_ 1 Two arcs can be drawn out as following one arc is more than 180 the other one is less than 180 The radius of the arc more than 180 should be specified by a negative value e g Fig 2 4 4 3 as arc Q is less than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R50 F300 as arc 2 is more than 180 _ 39 CGSB I HISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL G91 G02 X60 Y20 R 50 F300 ae point Start paint Fig 2 4 4 3 2 The arc equal to 180 can be programmed either by I J K or by R Example G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 110 F100 Equal to G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R10 F100 or G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R 10 F100 Note For the arc 180 the positi
297. uption coordinate system clearing steps press CTRL X till X flickers then press lt CANCEL gt key the coordinate system will be cleared The operations of Y Z are the same as above while the zero returning is being performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically 224 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 6 2 2 Relation of MPG interruption with other functions Machine lock If machine lock is effective the machine move is ineffective in MPG interruption Absolute coordinate value MPG interruption does not change the absolute coordinates Relative coordinate value MPG interruption does not change the relative coordinates Machine coordinate value The changing amount of machine coordinate is the displacement amount induced by MPG rotation Note The moving amount of MPG interruption is cleared when the manual reference point return is performed by each axis 6 3 Auxiliary control in MPG mode The auxiliary operation in MPG mode is identical with that in JOG mode See Section 4 2 and 4 3 for details 225 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 7 Auto Operation 7 1 Selection of the auto run programs 1 Program loading in auto mode a Press AUTO key to enter the Auto mode UBAN b Press key to enter the program page move the cursor to find the target program ENTER c Press key for confirmation 2 Progra
298. usually the 1 tool machining can be performed without altering the program even when the tool is changed After the tool positioning in Z axis e g GOZO the distances of the tool end to 18 CGS P HISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL the workpiece are identical This function is called tool length compensation 1 6 2 Tool radius compensation Because a tool has a radius if the tool goes by the path given by program the workpiece will be cut off a part for a radius wide To simplify the programming the program can be run by CNC around the workpiece with the tool radius deviated while the transient path of the intersections of the lines or the arcs can be processed automatically by system ee Cutter path using cutter radius compensation Machined part figure r a m Workpiece Zp Cutter If diameters of tools are stored in the CNC tool compensation list the tool can be moved by tool radius apart from the machining part figure by calling different radius compensation according to program This function is called tool radius compensation 1 7 Tool movement range stroke The parameter setting can specify the safe tool running range if the tool exceeds the range the system stops all the axes moving with overtravel alarm given This function is called stroke verification namely the software limit CGSB P HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 2 Part
299. ve or negative value of R doesn t affect the arc path 3 The arc equal to 360 can only be programmed by I J K Program example Fig 2 4 4 4 _ 40 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL The tool path programming for Fig 2 4 4 4 is as following 1 Absolute programming G90 GO X200 Y40 Z0 G3 X140 Y100 R60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 R50 Or GO X200 Y40 Z0 G90 G3 X140 Y100 I 60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 I 50 2 Incremental programming G0 G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 R60 F3000 G2 X 20 Y 40 R50 Or GO G90 X200 Y40 ZO G91 G3 X 60 Y60 I 60 F300 G2 X 20 Y 40 l 50 Restriction 1 If address J K and R are specified together in program the arc specified by R is in priority and others are ignored 2 If both arc radius parameter and the parameter from the start point to the circle center are not specified error message will be issued by system 3 Ifthe circle is to be interpolated only the parameters I J K from start point to circle center but the parameter R can be specified 4 Attention should be paid to the coordinate plane selection when the circular interpolation is being done 5 If X Y Z are all omitted i e the start point and the final point coincides as well as R is specified e g GO2R50 the tool doesn t move B Helical interpolation Format G02 G03 41 CGSB I HIS FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Arc of AY plane
300. verride of 5TH axis Setting range O0 99 9999 mm 0240 Gain adjustment data for spindle analog output Setting range 0 9999 0241 Compensation value of offset voltage for spindle analog output Setting range 0 9999 0242 Spindle speed at spindle orientation or motor speed 50 at spindle gear shift Setting range O 500 r min 0245 Time of spindle speed in position signal detection 200 Setting range O 1000 ms Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis 0246 5000 Setting range 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 1 297 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 0247 5000 Setting range 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 2 0248 Setting range 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 3 5000 0250 Spindle motor speed of gear 1 gear 2 shift 50 Setting range 0 1000 r min 0252 Spindle motor speed of gear 1 gear 2 shift in 50 tapping cycle Setting range 0 1000 r min 0254 Axis as counting for surface speed control Setting range 0 9999 0255 Spindle minimum speed for constant surface speed 100 control G96 Setting range O 1000 r min 0257 Spindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle 2000 Setting range O 1000 r min 0258 Spindle upper limit soeed 5000 Setting range O 5000 r min 0259 Spindle servo loop gain 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0260 Spindle speed baudrate with no alarm for spindle speed monitoring Set
301. ways 1 Simultaneous execution of the move and T instructions 2 Executing T instruction upon completion of the move instruction The selection of either 1 or 2 depends on the machine builder s specifications Refer to the machine builder s manual for details 167 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Ill OPERATION 168 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL 1 Operator Panel 1 1 Panel layout The 218M machine center has an integrated operator panel which is comprised by LCD area edit area interface display area and machine control area The layout of it is shown as following Edit area CiGSR CNC GSR 218M LCD area CANCE CANCEL NSERT ALTER DELETE FOB SAVE CHANGE BACKSPACE ENTER LC INDEX Soft keys area SET POSITION PROGRAM PARAMETER ma za gt EE j YN Y Mol 4 MACHINE ZERO STEP JOG yo MPG a j BLOCK SKIP K DRY RUN Mo oo ee eS Ss x Y _ 2 j mn Ck WORANG LIGHT UUs j Way U Uh RAPID x y z a AAL Ga af wy MST O ate SoG OS onean USTU UNK S 4 A a Imm
302. xis ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm L Distance of start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm U Corner radius no corner transition if omitted D Tool diameter number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 6 To make linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 7 To make circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G37 G38 oL U i lt gt XA O N 6 i 1 J 4 r Start point _ 84 CGS m ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL Explanation For the rectangle outside fine milling the interpolation direction of the transition arc is not consistent with that of the fine milling arc and the interpolation direction in explanation means that of the fine milling arc Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G37 instruction G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G37 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 F800 Canned
303. y to enter the data into coordinate system 2 Absolute mode It displays the absolute coordinate of the current tool by pressing ABS soft key which is called absolute in following see Fig 3 1 2 180 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPERARION MANUAL ACT POS CABSOLUTE 000002 N0120 000014 N00000 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 96 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 DOQ00 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 100 S0000 T0100 MDI REL ABS CALL MONI Fig 3 1 2 3 All mode It enters ALL mode by pressing ALL Jsoft key the coordinates in the following coordinate system can be displayed together A The position in relative coordinate system B The position in absolute coordinate system C The position in machine coordinate system D The offset amount in Handle interruption displacement E Subspeed F Remaining distance only displayed in Auto MDI DNC mode The display is as follows Fig 3 1 3 ACTUAL POSTTION 000002 N0120 CRELATIVE CABSOLUTE MACHINE X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED CREM DIST X Q 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z Q 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 S0000 T0100 MDI REL ABS ALL MONTY Fig 3 1 3 181 CGS I ISK FS GSK218M CNC system PROGRAMMING AND OPE

GSK 218M CNC System – Programming And Operation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GSK 218M CNC System &ndash; Programming And Operation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GSK 218M CNC System – Programming And Operation